#my bet's still on may/june for it to be official

[vesna-v-irkutske]

What do you think Artyom and Nikita (mostly Nikita) would think of their "fans" ?

Oh, Artyom likes having "fans". Knowing that someone is interested in him, and someone sees him as something more, tries to understand him, shows him sympathy, must stroke his ego. Although Daphne said somewhere that he was still kind of shocked by it, that he didn't understand it. Two things can be true at once.

May 22, 2023. "Vlada, hi. Got the letter on May 5th. • To be honest, it's an interesting admission — the interest in Nikita's and my philosophy... O_O I'm being completely serious: this is the first time I've seen something like this. I'm very flattered. =)"

June 26, 2023. "The reaction to the sudden popularity was calm. Although I was wildly freaking surprised. But at the same time, remained calm =D"

Although I bet he'd have cringed at some stuff and tried his best to ignore it and focus on something else.

January 6, 2024. "How I feel about trolls on the internet. I don't give a hoot about the internet and everyone who lives in it =) I hardly ever go there, so I don't come into contact with trolls."

As for Nikita, it's hard to say. Back then, he wanted attention and recognition. I'm sure both of them had fun playing Among Us in real life. Law enforcement officials said that they kind of liked talking about their crimes, that someone listened to them, paid attention to everything they said. They got what they wanted: attention and being treated seriously. They posed a real threat, they felt powerful, they were capable of changing lives.

Later, I think, the shame and realization woke up. Half a year after their arrest, Nikita said that he no longer needed all this, and that he felt ashamed. In November 2012, he said, "I feel sick/bad when I think about what I have done."

In June or early July 2012, Nikita gave an interview to a newspaper: — Why is Anoufriev supported on social media, but you don't have any fans? Is he more ideological? — I don't really care about this idea at all.

What I'm trying to say is that Nikita only talked to his mom and gave interviews to a couple of newspapers and journalists because they asked him, not because he was particularly eager for it. In short, he wasn't looking for contact. Just like his whole life before that. So I think he didn't even know about his "fans", or he wasn't very interested. Who knows exactly why there's not a single letter from Nikita from prison. He had no one to write to but his family. And I'm not really sure if someone else knew his address to write to him. Besides, he was a very closed-off, anxious and depressed person, I doubt that he wanted to communicate with strangers. Who knows what they might have written to him? All kinds of threats and insults? He knew it himself.

I think he'd have distanced himself from it all and disappeared into the shadows. At the same time, I'm not denying the possibility that he would be interested if he found out about the "fans". Just a sizeable maybe. But I think that he, just like Artyom, would be extremely surprised, confused and wouldn't understand this. Maybe he wouldn't necessarily have thought anything about their "fans". Maybe he'd have thought it was weird. Perhaps he'd constantly wonder why people were interested in him, if there was any catch in it, if they were actully laughing at him? Maybe he wouldn't really care.

But he'd totally be weirded the fuck out because of some of you, especially if it had to do with his looks and something romantic/sexual in general.

Of course, he knew about TCC, but he suddenly found himself on the receiving end of that interest. And I think he'd have been very distant with his "fans". He was never a talker, and even less with a bunch of different people. Maybe, by some miracle, he'd have managed to make a couple of friends (hopefully better than those he had before, just someone nice and compassionate instead of someone interested in very dark stuff; however, Nikita was very deeply convinced that he was nothing good, and that he didn't deserve anything good; besides, all these positive and pacifistic things were alien to his mentally ill, disappointed in the world, people and himself brain; there's comfort in suffering and misery, if it's something you've been used to since an early age, because it's familiar, and getting better requires a desire to change, effort and energy, which depressed people have very little of). Anyway, who knows how it'd have affected him. Don't encourage mentally ill person's bad tendencies.

[sarahjtv]

My Hero Academia Chapter 425 Spoiler Talk

I'm enjoying writing about this stuff again, though I've got a headache going on, so I'll do the best I can for now. I might add in stuff later:

I'm very happy to see our Big 3 graduate finally! I was kinda worried Mirio wouldn't even graduate for a second, but I'm happy to see that he did and he gave a valedictorian-esque speech to everyone talking about rebuilding society so everyone can have a bright future like Sir Nighteye wanted. Ending his speech with a joke is such a Mirio Togata thing 😂. I'm going to miss that guy so much 🥹

Why are Deku and some other students just lying on the ground with their feet up like that btw? Did they run out of chairs or something? It's a weird, quirky little thing that's just there, I guess.

The narration mentions that it's June in the MHA universe now (Happy Pride, btw 🏳️‍🌈). So, if the War took place around April or May, then it's been at least 1 month since we last saw the kids at the hospital.

Our class 1-A is now officially Class 2-A! They're finally second years as they should have been. Everyone including Aizawa is alive, though saying they're well is debatable. Everyone is clearly still injured in some way, shape, or form. Most have several bandages and even Jiro looks like she has a prosthetic for her missing left earphone jack.

Quick note: I notice that Bakugo is actually wearing a tie with his uniform now. It's still not buttoned up, but you can tell that he's definitely softened a bit since the war. EDIT: Looking at it again, it might not be buttoned up because he has a cast holding his right arm, but it’s hard to tell from the scans.

Aoyama not wanting to return to UA is sad, but it makes sense. I'd argue that he earned his place there regardless of AFO's influence, but I can understand that he doesn't feel that way and wants to redeem himself and become a hero in his own way without being forced to betray his friends and teachers.

Replacing Aoyama will be Hitoshi Shinso! I think most of us predicted that Shinso would be joining Class 2-A, but I'm very happy to see that confirmed. It's going to be a bit of a weird start for him, but I think he'll get used to his new classmates quickly.

Another quick note: The second-year cloud girl, Fuwa Mitawa, is seen quite a bit in this chapter and her return is something Horikoshi promised many volumes ago, so I'm glad to see him keep that promise.

Those two first panels of Shouto make me so sad, y'all 😭... His hair is so messy and you can see bags under his eyes. It's hard to tell because of the leaks, but I don't know if there's even light left in his eyes. He looks so exhausted. What happened to Dabi, Endeavor, and the rest of his family? I have no doubt that he's been agonizing over them for god knows how long. I hate seeing him like this, honestly. He's my favorite character and deserves all the good in the world, especially after the harsh life he's been put through. I want to give Shouto all the hugs in the world 🩵.

I don't think Deku smiled at all this whole chapter btw. He tries to talk to Ochako at one point, but she interrupts him with a comment about his new haircut. He just looks sad this whole chapter. I bet he's still grieving and processing what happened. I need Izuku to open up to someone because he can't just bottle this up.

Then we have this mysterious man walking around a desolate town. We have absolutely no idea who this is, but apparently it isn't someone we know of. I want to say it's a grown-up Tenko Shimura somehow, but even that might be too farfetched.

Finally, there's Shouto and the Todorokis. Shouto reassures Deku that he's ok, but I bet my gatcha game currency that he's putting on a brave face because that final beautiful panel of him does not scream "I'm ok!" to me. If anything, I'm amazed Shouto doesn't look like he got any other permanent scars on his face at least.

It looks like Shouto is going to see his family at the hospital. Specifically Endeavor and what might be Dabi who's being kept alive in a big machine. It's hard to tell because the scans are so unclear, but I'm 90% sure that's Dabi in there. It's a miracle that man is alive given he was just a skeleton last we saw him. I'm 99% sure we're going to get a Hellish Todoroki Family Part 3 or something next chapter.

But, we won't see that until 3 weeks from now because we're officially on a 2-week break. There isn't a given reason why like Jujustu Kaisen got (Gege Akutami is sick, so he's taking 2-week break too), so I really hope Horikoshi is ok. It's either he's sick too or he needs time to think of the final chapters of MHA. Or both, that too. Regardless, any breaks given to Kohei Horikoshi to give him time to rest is ok with me. Just sucks for us as fans. Leaving us on THAT kind of a cliffhanger is just mean 😭

[greenesmyfavcolor]

What year does Little Shop of Horrors take place?

Alright, as you can tell from the title, Imma bout to dissect which exact year LSOH takes place since there’s never been any concrete answer from an official source to my knowledge and lemme tell ya, it’s harder than you think lol

Ok so we know that Audrey II came to earth on September 21st/23rd (21st in the stage version and 23rd in the movie version) during the 1960’s “in an early year of a decade” but they never tell us the exact year.

However we do know that Kennedy was president during the events of the movie as he is mentioned on Seymour’s radio and his presidency lasted from 1961 to 1963.

And in the directors cut (which I consider canon to some extent), Jason and the Argonauts is shown to be playing in a theater during Don’t Feed the Plants and that movie came out in June of 1963 so that must mean LSOH has to take place after that date. So the year has to be 1963 if Kennedy is still president and that movie is playing in theaters.

However Audrey II mentions during Feed Me that Seymour could be on Jack Paar’s radio show and that ran from 1957 to 1962.

So now it can’t be 1963 as Jack Paar would have already ended by then and it can’t be 1962 as Jason wouldn’t have been playing in theaters yet.

However LSOH can still take place in both years. Who’s to say that Audrey II didn’t take over the world until the year 1963? It could have been 1962 when the events of the film started but by the time Audrey II gained enough power to start to destroy NYC, a few months could have passed for it to be 1963. And the film does begin in September which is late into the year so it is plausible.

But here’s when this whole theory really starts to fall apart lol.

Before the shop is renovated, there’s a calendar in the back that’s very hard to read but based on the positioning of the dates, it matches up with the year 1964 as the first day of the month starts on a Tuesday. And it’s shown at the very beginning of the movie so the solar eclipse has to have happened in 1964 which goes against everything else that has been brought up so far. Although the year the calendar says doesn’t necessarily mean that’s the actual year, it’s kind of a long shot to assume that they would have the wrong calendar year hung up.

Also neither the 21st nor the 23rd of September fall on a Thursday in 1964 which is the supposed day of the week the eclipse happened according to the same radio broadcast that mentions JFK.

Also also I looked up what exact month Jack Paar’s radio show ended and it just so happened to end in March of 1962 so LSOH can’t take place in 1962 if it starts in September.

So right now, it may sound like we’ve officially hit a dead end. But the thing is, I’ve mainly been listing off things that show up in the movie which isn’t the original source material. That would be the 1982 stage version. We have to remember that anything in the movie that contradicts what year it takes place in in the stage version is not solid evidence because that’s not what was originally intended. So technically, we only have to go off what the original stage production states if we want to figure out the year.

So in the stage version, it’s still mentioned that it takes place in the 1960’s “in an early year of a decade” and that Jack Paar had a radio show before 1962. The only things the movie brought up were the argonauts, Kennedy, the calendar, and what day of the week the eclipse happened. If you want to go ahead and count anything in the movie as canon evidence as to when LSOH takes place, be my guest but there’s so many things that contradict when it does happens that I’m just going to go off the original stage production.

Because of this, my bet is that the events of LSOH start on September 21st, in between the years 1960 and 1961.

I wish I had more of a solid answer so if anyone has any more evidence that suggests what year it might take place from either the stage or movie version, lmk cause I’ve been thinking on this for way too long 🥲

[tayfabe75]

I am so glad I found this blog! I’ve been following this along since last year and to me it seems so obvious! They were sad they had to go underground in June and when that random article said they were back together I think it spooked them and they decided they needed to do something drastic to keep attention off of them until enough time passed and Taylor corrected the narrative somewhat with tortured poets. They decided on PR relationships. With gabbriette it’s obvious, she is less famous and obviously looking for clout, it’s very common for these types to hook up with someone more famous and boost their profile. He was looking for prospects and I think he tried with meredith first but it didn’t work out for some reason. She definitely signed an NDA because all she did was unfollow him when he launched with gabbriette. Gabbriette was dating another guy basically a week before she started “dating” matty. Maybe they were already on the rocks and she jumped at the opportunity. Charli probably helped identify her. 

I think they made this decision in July after that article said they were back together, whoever wrote the article had some sort of proof probably and was paid off. I bet someone they know sold them out and they were both pissed. It would explain why matty had his breakdown in July, frustrated that it had to come to this, but they both think of each other as the end game and decided it was worth it to do this for a while and then slowly roll out a reunion. Matty’s breakdown in July happened around the same time travis made that friendship bracelet comment on the podcast. Travis obviously was down to sign this relationship contract to boost his chances at getting into hollywood. So basically I think this was all new to matty and he didn’t know how to act which explains his weird social media activity and trial and error with meredith. It also explains his breakdowns on stage later because he was probably sick of it while taylor is better at hiding her true emotions from fans and she has likely done this before. Basically I think that the new album is a necessary step in a plan that will allow them to end up together and not have the public freak out as much. It is no mistake that she added so many clues for people to decipher about matty. Some people are still in denial or think she hates him because of one song, but overall there has been a shift in public perception and interest in matty aside from the controversies.

My only question is how long the contracts are???? I have been reading it’s usually a year minimum but I’m sure taylor can negotiate less, wasn’t tom h only a few months? I’m at the point now where I’m just waiting to see how long they drag this out until the breakups and how they handle it, if they stagger the breakups, how they re-launch etcetera. 

What do you think???

Hi anon! Interestingly, the man who reported that Taylor and Matty were still together last July worked for The Sun, who were the ones that broke the news of their dating back in May! In September, he also suggested that The 1975 would feature on 1989. Mysteriously, he would go on to retire in December, shortly before the "Slut!" collab leak. Convenient timing!

Though Taylor would later backdate her new relationship to July, all evidence points to September for the official launch of both her and Matty's new relationships.

It seems Taylor might have had some sort of deal with the NFL as far back as 2019 in the Lover era, and that is around the same time that Matty met his current partner, who was receiving complimentary tickets to one of his shows back then. You're right, just before Matty, she had been in a serious, longterm relationship with another guy (who is now, incestuously perhaps, dating Matty's other ex - yep, the one who came both before and after Taylor! Also, these two are the absolute most hysterical side characters in all of this). Like I said before, it's also convenient that both of these relationships are basically pre-existing fandom memes from 2020!:

As you can see, I am a bit reluctant to actually type out any names because I don't want to attract fans of those relationships. I'm not here to crash anyone's party! I just happened to witness a once-in-twenty-lifetimes kind of love and I'm just trying to make sense of everything that's transpired since. Who they end up with doesn't really concern me, though I can't help but root for their reunion because, you know, I have hearing. (Which, by the way… I cannot for the life of me understand how Taylor's fans heard the masterpiece 'About You' and would rather romanticize Taylor being a "WAG" or a "teammate's girlfriend" rather than a muse for a fellow musician who is, dare I say, on equal footing with her as a songwriter and musician! I'm stumped)

But either way, like I said - I am not in the business of villainizing any characters Matty or Taylor choose to associate with. I do believe that these are PR relationships and that both new partners have gotten plenty of opportunities since becoming the public partner for both musicians, and that's not even a bad thing! If they are meant to distract from the controversy and feed ravenous fans, then so be it. Genuinely, I'm happy for them.

I'm glad you mentioned the friendship bracelet! 'Cause sometimes I clown every now and then that the album Midnights seems almost like foreshadowing for what would transpire in Taylor's public life since it dropped! We have a 'Lavender Haze': January at the O2 love spiral, someone talking talk and going viral on Adam Friedland, 'Maroon'/SotB: Taylor falling again for someone from her past, YOYOK: Taylor accepting a friendship bracelet, next up - perhaps a declined proposal? As predicted in both 'Midnight Rain' and 'Bejeweled'…

As for contracts, anon, I'm glad you asked! Taylor's partner's publicist, Pia Malihi, is another interesting rabbit hole to fall down. She got her start in a company called Bowery Public Relations/EMCBowery (of all things) and has partnered with fellow publicist Jack Ketsoyan to launch Full Scope Public Relations. A few years ago, Jack went on record exposing fake romances he helped set up, calling them "love contracts" and that they "legally bind famous couples together for at least a year".

Now, what's interesting about the "year" estimate above is that there are three possible end dates for this contract, if indeed, that's what it is. September is when they actually launched as a couple. However, Taylor backdated this relationship to July! Strangely, as of today, the media is saying that it is Taylor's year anniversary, despite the fact she was definitely with Matty a year ago. So… perhaps we're stuck with this stunt until September. If we're lucky? July. If we're truly fortuitous, then perhaps it ends this month! Or you know, maybe never. Who's to say?

Make no mistake though, anon, no matter how hard Twitter tries to virtue signal... Taylor wants us to pay attention to her love life and public persona for some reason. Of course, my theory is that she's done playing Barbie and is ready to burn down the dollhouse.

Thanks for the ask! 🤍

[ilguna]

this is gonna be a rant about my life lately and how stressed out i’ve been

i know it’s been a while, i’ll get on track with writing and then eventually fall off. with june, i started working more because my birthday trip was coming up, and since then, i’ve been busy because im gonna visit family in washington this month (july).

ever since i came back from my birthday, i have had nothing but anxiety over everything that’s been happening.

some information for everyone: i work in a restaurant. i work FOH (host, togo, bussing, expo, serving). when i met my boyfriend back in november, it’s because he started working BOH (kitchen). he’s worked for this company before, it’s just been a while. and he worked at a different location. he’s a couple years older than me.

him and i started talking at the end of january, started dating on valentine’s day. he made a major mistake a couple days later, and it’s typically what people break up over. i decided to stay with him. but i made the decision after everyone at the restaurant found out. i practically didn’t tell anyone, it was my cousin who told people, that found out before me. my cousin is/was friends with the girl that told her.

i have made my decision to stay with him, i have made that explicitly clear. my close friends (4 of them) were all against it at first, but since then, 2 of them have officially come around and aren’t actively seeking out trouble for him. 1 of them is on the fence. the last 1 has promised that she will never like him and will not make an effort.

she told me this in february, and i thought i could handle her, and that she might even change her mind, but she’s not going anywhere. i had a conversation with her towards the middle of may trying to tell her that she’s making me uncomfortable and im becoming avoidant (no contact = out of mind). she didn’t offer any peace of mind at all.

my birthday trip comes around, we’re good. i had a lot of fun in vegas. then comes the following weekend, she (difficult friend) was bartending, i was her cocktail. and 2/3 separate times, one of the male servers that have been here for like 10+ years comes over to talk shit about my boyfriend.

tidbit: my boyfriend has since become a manager (at the end of february) and the GM/AGM were good with it. i’ve been here for 3 years, the GM knew him from location 1. she didn’t see an issue.

which involves another female server, who he’s ALSO known from location 1. she was asking him to cut the floor, she did it in a way that was rude, and she’s known for being like that. he called her disrespectful for it. i guess she told the male server, because that friday he came into the bar, told the friend bartender, and then said “i bet he beats women”.

i was upset, and i took it to the GM. i stayed out of the bar for the rest of the night until she finally cut me. GM talked to the male server about it, he denied it. GM talked to the female server that was disrespectful, nothing really came of it. since then, several people in the restaurant have been referring to him as a woman/wife beater.

my boyfriends been having a hard time getting anyone in the restaurant to respect him since my cousin decided that it was her responsibility to spread my business without giving me time to cope and decide.

its upsetting. i get anxiety anytime my friend and the male server are working together because they’ve been caught talking shit since. i think both of them can tell that im on edge because the male server doesn’t really talk to me. but my friend looked at me today and called me grumpy. but there was so much i wanted to say to her about how shitty she’s being.

i’m “not supposed to” choose a boyfriend over a friend but i have tried. i have done my time defending her and her actions. i have given her time. i’ve explained that she’s making me upset. and she’s still doing it.

my boyfriend even walked in to her talking with one of the other girl servers who is NOTORIOUS for talking shit and spreading it today. and her boyfriend (who works in the kitchen) is just as bad with it. the GM has doubled down and is saying that my boyfriend is the problem. our relationship is the problem. she can’t do anything about the servers. but she’s lazy and a people pleaser so she’s not going to do anything, anyway.

i’m just so tired of feeling like this. i don’t want to talk to her. i don’t want to be her friend. the only thing i can do anymore is tell her that im done being friends with her if she can’t respect MY relationship. if you want to actively seek out a persons downfall, then you’re a shit person. especially since she’s supposed to be one of my best friends.

shes older than me too, she should be more mature but she’s not acting like it anymore. i don’t want to lose her as a friend, but if this is the only way that i can show her that i’ve tolerated enough, then it’s what has to be done. and it’ll probably make a statement in the restaurant, too.

idk. that’s just what’s going on. i’ve exhausted the people i can talk to, so i thought id share on here to type it all out. it doesn’t make me feel any better, though.

[etes-secrecy-post]

Hi, before I explain my post, I want to say something important.

• What you see my blog has become a major overhaul. And despite the changes, I decided that my 2nd account will be now my artwork blog with a secret twist.

⚠️NEW RULE! (W/ BIGGER TEXT!)⚠️

⚠️ SO PLEASE DO NOT SHARE MY 2nd ACCOUNT TO EVERYONE! THIS SECRECY BLOG OF MINE IS FOR CLOSES FRIENDS ONLY!⚠️

• AND FOR MY CLOSES FRIENDS, DON’T REBLOG IT. INSTEAD, JUST COPY MY LINK AND PASTE IT ON YOUR TUMBLR POST! JUST BE SURE THE IMAGE WILL BE REMOVED AND THE ONLY LEFT WAS THE TEXT.

⚠️ SHARING LINKS, LIKE POSTS, REBLOG POSTS, STEALING MY SNAPSHOT PHOTOS/RECORDED VIDEOS/ARTWORKS (a.k.a. ART THIEVES) OR PLAGIARIZING FROM UNKNOWN TUMBLR STRANGERS WILL IMMEDIATELY BE BLOCKED, RIGHT AWAY!⚠️

😡 WHATEVER YOU DO, DO NOT EVER LIKED & REBLOG MY SECRET POST! THIS IS FOR MY SECRET FRIENDS ONLY, NOT YOU! 😡

Okay? Capiche? Make sense? Good, now back to the post…↓

Title: Happy 28th Birthday Bryan360

Hello, September! 🍂🍁 I had no plans on sharing my throwback artworks (a.k.a. #OnThisDay post) because it is time for another celebrating a birthday! Its my A-Pal's 28th birthday! 🎂🎁🥳

IMPORTANT NOTE #1: No Art Trade this month, with my A-Pal. 😊 So, you know, give him a chance to relax while he's celebrating like my previous Bday? Yeah. ☺

• "First" off, I want to apologize for missing out on the respective anniversaries of Bryan360's three main OCs; Maxwell 🐰🖌️, May 💥👊🐰, and Sam ⚽🦊. That's because, I was dealing with my emotions on my mistakes and mishaps, not to mention I missed using my PC desktop since June 2024. I'm still using my mom's laptop... *sigh* 😔Furthermore, when I try to apply for a job on my current social media, I've sort of made a mistake but I dodge the bullet from a job scam. Thanks, Mom for reminding me from 2019. I'm still a helper at my parents' small rug business without pay.😥 So much for getting the opportunity for a real-life job and purchasing whatever I want (including my dream plush I like is that legit "DogDay" plushie doll 🐶☀️🥺🤗)

• And "Second", my OCs never get a chance to see me wearing PJs, including the ones that were gifted by Bryan360's OCs. So, I thought to myself "Why not I combine his upcoming birthday & my OCs wearing PJs into one celebratorily artwork package?" 🤔 And thus, an ultimate yet unique birthday slumber for his 28th-year birthday! 😁🥳🎊🌙🌃 After all, night day is ALWAYS a perfect way to celebrate any occasion! And the cherry on top of his birthday cake is adding pillow mattresses with their clothes gifted by the Rabbit-Fox family! What's not to love? 👕👖🥰🤗

Spot 🐶🏎️ [wearing his owned PJs from Maxwell]: Yeah! Nice idea, creator! 😁 I bet, he'll likes your gift art just like he did to you! 😊 Right now, we could stay up night for a nice midnight Birthday Slumber Party! 🛏️🌙🥳🎂

Riya 🐰🏎️ [wearing her owned PJs from May]: Yes, sir! A unique kind of birthday celebration is something interesting than a regular celebration! 😁 *hugging, rubbing, and squeezing on her pillow mattress* 👕👖🥰🤗

Cude 🐰🤖 [wearing his owned PJs from Sam]: I could agree your statements, twins! On behalf on our creator and their family, have a wonderful birthday to you, Mr. Bryan! 😊

IMPORTANT NOTE #2: His gift art → [CLICK ME!] from my 31st birthday's cake supposedly be written as "Maligayang Kaarawan" 🎂🇵🇭, instead he wrote it in a Spanish words. I would say, that this a error in mistranslation of sorts. So, I have to do something the same thing as he did to me for a fair mistake. 😅

Fun Fact ☝️😮: The Philippines in their ancient times used to have an official "Spanish" language owing to the historic colonization. 🇪🇸🇵🇭 However, by the time when the WWII ended, the Philippines already gained their independence from the United States, and the official "Spanish" language for the Philippines was removed. 🇵🇭📖 Nevertheless...

Well, that's all for now! And once again, Happy Birthday, A-Pal! 🇺🇸🇵🇷🤗🥳🎁🎂🎊

Cude (HTF OC) and the Speedster Twins (Spot & Riya; Chowder OCs) - created by ME! Maxwell, May, and Sam (Rabbits and Fox OCs) - owned by @bryan360

[katmaibearfan]

Blog FAQ

Have a question about something related to this blog and can't find an answer somewhere else? Check here before you send me an ask!

This is a constant work-in-progress, and is subject to change and grow as the scope of this blog changes and grows as well.

Questions About Me:

Whats your main blog?

@caseyscraftycorner -- i mostly reblog stuff but also post about fiber arts, board games, ttrpgs (note: not d&d 5e), and various musings.

Who are the bears in your pfp/header image?

Right now, the bear in my profile picture is 903 Gully and the bear in my header image is 151 Walker. The photos are screenshots from the Explore.org cams and were taken by me in fall 2024

How do you know so much about the bears?

See the media links in my new pinned post. It's all just those and the powers of autism and adhd.

When did you start watching the bear cams?

I started watching them (or highlights re-posted to youtube) occasionally back in 2019, after 435 Holly won Fat Bear Week, but it wasn't until 2023 that i got really into them.

How do you find so much time to watch the live cams and post about them?

I'm unable to work due to a combination of physical, developmental, and mental illness disabilities, and I need to fill my time somehow. Also, it's good background noise to have on when I'm crocheting/knitting/making pixel art.

How many bears can you identify?

It depends on some specific circumstances, but i'd say i can generally identify about a dozen of the bears at Brook's River. This might sound like a lot, but keep in mind that ~80 non-cub bears are seen at brooks river each year.

Can you identify this bear for me?

Nope! Your best bet is to check the comments on the live cams for an ID. That's where I get about 90% of the IDs in my posts from.

You blocked me/my friend, what gives?

if I have blocked someone on this blog it's probably because I saw something transphobic on their blog. I'm a nonbinary man, so transphobes will be blocked on sight. I also block blogs that are blank, to reduce bots. The only other situation in which I block people is when they post about hunting bears specifically, but this is really uncommon for me to run into and as such is not likely to be the answer.

You blocked me on your personal account, can you tell me why?

No, and asking me this will get you blocked here too. I block people liberally on my main account for personal reasons. If i block you there & not here, you can assume you didn't do anything "wrong" to get blocked. It's a me thing & you just happened to run up against it.

Questions About Blog Language & Topics

Why do you list most bears' ages as X.5 years?

Brown Bears are born in mid-winter, and we see them between late June and late October, so it's more accurate. it's also the terminology used by Katmai, particularly for cubs.

Why do only some bears have names, and are those official or unofficial names?

All bears that frequent Brooks Falls have numbers, but only some have names. The older bears with names (for example: Holly, Otis, Chunk, Grazer) were largely named by rangers at Katmai. However, the NPS has moved away from naming monitored animals, due to the issue of subconscious pet-ification or humanization of wild animals by humans. You can read more about their position here. Young bears with names (for example: 428 Studious and 429 Social) are named by the bear cam viewers and not staff at Katmai, so their names are unofficial -- though you may still see these unofficial names used for Fat Bear Week, which is affiliated with the Katmai Conservancy rather than the NPS.

Which bears are related to who/are there any family trees/is 856 503's father/etc

Bear pregnancy is complicated. Both sows and boars mate with multiple partners during mating season, and bears from the same litter can have different fathers. Therefore, any ideas about any boar being any specific bear's father is purely speculation unless we have DNA evidence.

In addition, unless we see a cub with their mother in early summer and then they separate shortly afterwards, saying that any specific subadult was any specific cub is also generally speculation (again, unless there is DNA evidence) because cubs especially can change a lot between when they go to den and when they emerge from their den. The guesswork we do here is more reliable than guessing fathers, but it is still fundamentally guesswork. There are DNA collection efforts every few years at Katmai, to monitor the genetic diversity of the bears in the area, but not enough bears have had their DNA collected at this point to accurately map most families at this time.

[saelterlude]

Around October, I noticed my AO3 wordcount for this year has reached near 40k. So I thought, "Hey Sael, surely you can reach 50.000 words by the end of the year right?" Nevermind the fact that my thesis deadline is also in December.

But hey, I goddamn did. 51.236 words. Here's a list of the fics I wrote in 2023. Chronologically, when last updated, because that's cool. + short summary/my core idea for each fic.

Happy New Year!

February

Home Address, 35 Portland Row (Lockwood & Co.)

So did George just one day knocked on Lockwood's door with Skull under his arm being all, "Hey, I commited theft." Pre-canon exposition.

April

Buried Apple (Undertale AU)

Dream watched his twin die, got turned to stone, and wakes up to someone parading in his twin's corpse. How did he grieved?

May

The Hidden Basement (Lockwood & Co. and The Sandman)

Jessamy's regrets of failing to save Dream resulted in a haunted mansion. Who else would come take care of the haunting but Lockwood & Co.

June

Killer's Soul Journey (Undertale AU, yea this fandom really inspired me)

Killer got 4 stages, he also got the gang and Color. So what if each stages react differently to each group.

That Feeling and That Tone. (Undertale AU)

Just a reset in the life of Killer and Chara.

Tales from The Library (Undertale AU)

Same universe as "The Hidden Basement". What's life like for Lockwood & Co. with a type three bird ghost, Jessamy?

July

Colorful Conversations (Undertale AU)

It's in the name. Three conversations that help Color be... Color.

Divergence (Undertale AU)

We explore how time works in the multiverse, sorta.

Versa(tear)lity (Undertale AU)

There are many ways to utilize Killer's tears, here are some of them. Crack. This is just a pure crackfic.

The Circlet (Undertale AU)

There's a gap in Dream's circlet. It widens as Dream grows and his skull gets bigger. There's none in Nightmare's circlet.

August

Feelings Imminent (Undertale AU)

Killer have trouble feeling, which means he doesn't know when he's hungry, tired, or hurt. Horror tries to help.

September

Boiled Care (Undertale AU)

Cross and Horror talk about authority figures over breakfast.

October

I Know That You Can Track It Back To Me (Link Click)

Cheng Xiaoshi wants to know from whom did Lu Guang learns all the ins and outs of their powers. Well he does have time traveling powers, so learning about the past should be easy.

Like Once You Did For Me (Link Click)

Lu Guang's POV of "I Know That You Can Track It Back To Me". On a sad and lonely night, Lu Guang comes across a strange man.

So What's With The Sudden Costume Change? (Link Click)

For a fashionable show, Lu Guang's season two outfit is just a cat pajama. Oh wait, there's also the cool theater outfits. But that came out of nowhere so why? Crack, Actor AU.

A White Dream (Link Click)

A death node cannot be change, that's what Lu Guang said, but that can't be right. Cheng Xiaoshi is sure, he changed a death node once before.

November

A Gray Coat (Link Click)

Emma's parents waited all night for her, not knowing she's lying dead under a bridge. How does a parent grief over their child?

December

Shattered Reflections (Link Click)

Cheng Xiaoshi-Lu Guang's powers swapped with Li Tianchen-Li Tianxi's powers. How would that work? How would the story progress?

(I swear I will finish the last chapter soon. I promise. I just gotta graduate first.)

How to Lose A Bet and Still Win (Link Click)

The biggest betting pool in Guidu University is "when will Cheng Xiaoshi and Lu Guang become official". Some students try to win the bet by manipulating the not-couple and sabotaging other betters. Outsider POV.

[silentwolfkills]

Naruto Timeline and Birthdays: Part 3:

Year 48: (9 Tails Attack) (Hiruzen Returns as Hokage)

(Land of Fire)

Naruto Uzumaki 10th of Oct, Sasuke Uchiha 23rd of July, Sakura Haruno 28th of March, Hinata Hyuga 27th of Dec, Shino Aburame 23rd Jan, Kiba Inuzuka 7th July, Shikamaru Nara 22nd of Sep, Ino Yamanaka 23rd of Sep, Choji Akimichi 1st of May, Shiho 18th of June, Makaro Akimichi, Tamaki, Tobio, Ami, Kasumi, Fuki, Kota, Buna, Shinta,

(Land of Wind)

Gaara 19th of Jan, Ittetsu, Abiru, Tsuchino, Tomari, Kashike,

(Land of Grass)

Karin Uzumaki 20th of June,

(Land of Water)

Suigetsu Hozuki 18th of Feb,

(Land of Lighting)

Omoi 26th of Dec, Karui 14th of Feb,

Notes: Naruto said to be 17 on the day the 4th war ended which was the 10th of Oct, his birthday.

Said to be 12 in 1st Databook.

Said to be 13 in 2nd Databook.

Said to be 15 in Mini Databook.

Said to be 16 in 3rd Databook.

Said to be 17 in Naruto Status Card Collection Acrylic Card.

Graduated Academy at 12 and became Genin.

Naruto was born on the day the 9 tails attack happened.

Said in 4th Databook 4 years ago a huge fierce battle at the valley of the end!! In chapter 228 When Sasuke was 13.

Naruto Datacard / Ninja Encyclopaedia Entry 7 in Boruto Chapter 8.

Naruto’s Birthday Column Part 1 and Part 2 From Naruto Official Site.

Was in a Team with Sasuke and Sakura in Team 7/ Team Kakashi.

Ninja Number 012607.

Rank Hokage.

Note: Sasuke said to be 17 During 4th Ninja war in 4th Databook.

Said to be 12 in 1st Databook.

Said to be 13 in 2nd Databook.

Said to be 16 in 3rd Databook.

Said to be 17 in Naruto Status Card Collection Acrylic Card.

Graduated Academy at 12 and became Genin.

Said in 4th Databook that about 12 years ago Nostalgic memories with Itachi, Every time Sasuke remembers when he was poked in the forehead by his older brother when he narrowed their distance he feels a tinge of loneliness from chapter 402, which isn’t correct because that scene is from when Itachi was still in academy and him and Sasuke playing hide and seek which was 15 years ago.

Chapter 220-221 Sasuke starts academy.

In Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night and in Chapter 403, Sasuke Awakens the Sharigan with 1 tomoe.

In Chapter 27, he Awakened 2 Tomoe Sharigan.

in Chapter 229, he Awakened 3 Tomoe Sharigan.

In Chapter 402, he Awakened MS.

In Chapter 553, he Obtains EMS.

In Chapter 673, he Obtained a 6 Tomoe Purple Rinnegan.

Said in Boruto Chapter 1 by Mitsuki, I’ve head my Dad say that Master Sasuke is the Other Hokage!

Said in Boruto Chapter 15 Tento says I bet you can do it Boruto become an amazing Ninja who supports the Hokage, which on Sasuke’s SSR X Ninja Cards says he’s the Supporting Shadow.

Sasuke Datacard / Ninja Encyclopaedia Entry 8 in Boruto Chapter 9.

Sasuke’s Birthday Column Part 1 and Part 2 From Naruto Official Site.

Was in a Team with Naruto and Sakura in Team 7/ Team Kakashi.

Ninja Number 012606.

Rank Sasaukage.

Notes: Sakura said to be 17 During 4th Ninja war in 4th Databook Page 143.

Said to be 12 in 1st Databook.

Said to be 13 in 2nd Databook.

Said to be 15 in Mini Databook.

Said to be 16 in 3rd Databook.

Said to be 17 in Naruto Status Card Collection Acrylic Card, Which on the 22nd of August 2023 Shueisha made a Public Apology, saying the Card’s age was incorrect that the Card was supposed say 16 not 17, but the Card is correct and Public Apology is incorrect, due to the fact the card is 4th War Sakura, which Multiple Sources tell us Sakura’s age and stays consistent, which she would be 17 during the Year and events of 4th Ninja War, which only thing contradicting her age is there Public Apology on Card and also re-released the Card and changed 17 to 16 on new version of Card which is incorrect.

Graduated Academy at 12 and became Genin and Promoted to Chunin at 14 in 3rd Databook.

Said in 4th Databook 4 years ago she strongly swore to grow up…! From Chapter 236 when she was 13.

In Boruto Movie Databook it’s stated Sakura’s Last name / Surname / Clan name is now Uchiha.

Sakura Datacard / Ninja Encyclopaedia Entry 9 in Boruto Chapter 10.

Sakura’s Birthday Column From Naruto Official Site.

Was in a Team with Naruto and Sasuke in Team 7/ Team Kakashi.

Ninja Number 012601.

Rank Jonin.

Notes: Hinata said to be 16 During 4th Ninja War in 4th Databook and would turn 17, 2 months after 4th Ninja War, which took place in Oct.

Said to be 12 in 1st Databook.

Said to be 13 in 2nd Databook.

Said to be 16 in 3rd Databook.

Said to be 16 in Naruto Status Card Collection Acrylic Card, which would would turn 17, 2 months after 4th Ninja War, which took place in Oct and she would turn 17 in Dec.

Graduated Academy at 12 and became Genin and Promoted to Chunin at 14 in 3rd Databook.

Said in 4th Databook about 6 years ago feelings that haven’t changed from her weak self… from chapter 538 when she was 11.

Hinata’s Birthday Column From Naruto Official Site.

Was in a Team with Shino and Kiba in Team 8/ Team Kurenai.

Ninja Number 012612.

Rank Chunin.

Notes: Shino said to be 17 during 4th ninja war in 4th Databook Page 021 4th ninja war is in Oct Naruto is 17 at end of 4th ninja war. Said to be 12 in 1st Databook.

Said to be 13 in 2nd Databook.

Said to be 16 in 3rd Databook.

Graduated Academy at 12 and became Genin and Promoted to Chunin at 14.

Boruto: The new leaves soaring through the blue sky! Novel 1 Chapter 5 Page 159, Boruto states his Dad, Naruto stated Shino is on Par with a Jonin, but his Rank is Chunin.

Was in a Team with Hinata and Kiba in Team 8/ Team Kurenai.

Ninja Number 012618.

Rank Chunin.

Notes: Kiba said to be 17 During 4th Ninja war in 4th Databook Page 024 and 4th ninja war is in Oct Naruto is 17 at end of 4th ninja war.

Said to be 12 in 1st Databook.

Said to be 13 in 2nd Databook.

Said to be 16 in 3rd Databook.

Graduated Academy at 12 and became Genin and Promoted to chunin at 14.

Was in a Team with Shino and Hinata in Team 8/ Team Kurenai.

Ninja Number 012620.

Notes: Shikamaru said to be 17 in 4th Databook.

Said to be 12 in 1st Databook and promoted to Chunin at 12.

Said to be 13 in 2nd Databook.

Said to be 15 in Mini Databook.

Said to be 16 in 3rd Databook.

Said to be 17 in Naruto Status Card Collection Acrylic Card.

Said in 4th Databook 4 years ago An ultra-capable guy with an IQ of 200 whose favourite phrase is “what a Drag/pain”!! His tendency to find everything troublesome is unrivalled. However, his intelligence has shown a glimpse of his talent from the early stages, from Chapter 173 when he was 12 turning 13 that year.

Shikamaru Datacard / Ninja Encyclopaedia Entry 10 in Boruto Chapter 12.

Shikamaru’s Birthday Column From Naruto Official Site.

Was in a Team with Choji and Ino in Team 10/ Team Asuma.

Ninja Number 012611.

Rank Hokage.

Notes: Ino said to be 17 in 4th Databook. Said to be 12 in 1st Databook.

Said to be 13 in 2nd Databook.

Said to be 16 in 3rd Databook.

Graduated Academy at 12 and became Genin and Promoted to Chunin at 14 in 3rd Databook.

Was in a Team with Shikamaru and Choji in Team 10/ Team Asuma.

Ninja Number 012604.

Notes: Choji said to be 17 During 4th Ninja war in 4th Databook Page 018.

Said to be 12 in 1st Databook.

Said to be 13 in 2nd Databook.

Said to be 16 in 3rd Databook.

Graduated Academy at 12 and became Genin and Promoted to Chunin at 14.

Was in a Team with Shikamaru and Ino in Team 10/ Team Asuma.

Ninja Number 012625.

Notes: Shiho said to be 17 During the Pain Arc in the 4th Databook, she could be a year older depending what month Pain attack happened and when Jiraiya’s died which I think is may so I think she would be a year older.

Note: Makaro said to be 17 in 4th Databook During 4th Ninja war which ended on 10th of Oct, in Chapter 631.

Note: Tamaki said to be 16 in 3rd Databook character detail list chapter 354 when Sasuke visits her grandmother Nekobaa shop and he leaves to go kill Itachi.

Note: Tobio said to be 12 in 1st Databook.

Note: Ami said to be 12 in 1st Databook.

Note: Kasumi said to be 12 in 1st Databook.

Note: Fuki said to be 12 in 1st Databook.

Note: Kota said to be 6 in 2nd Databook in Chapter 221 when Sasuke started Ninja Academy which Itachi was 11 when Sasuke started the Ninja Academy.

Note: Buna said to be 13 in 2nd Databook in chapter 144.

Note: Shinta said to be 4 in 2nd Databook in Chapter 190, when he refused to let Choji play ninja.

Note: Gaara said to be 17 During 4th Ninja war in 4th Databook Page 077.

3rd Databook said Gaara is 16 when Kidnapped by Deidara and Sasori and Died at 16 from Shukaku 1 tails being extracted from him and was Revived by Chiyo who used her Transmigration to give her life to bring him back to life.

Said to be 12 in 1st Databook.

Said to be 13 in 2nd Databook.

Said to be 15 in Mini Databook.

Said to be 17 in Naruto Status Card Collection Acrylic Card, Which on the 22nd of August 2023 Shueisha made a Public Apology, saying the Card’s age was incorrect that the Card was supposed say 16 not 17, but the Card is correct and Public Apology is incorrect, due to the fact the Card is 4th War Gaara, which Multiple Sources tell us Gaara’s age and stays consistent, which he would be 17 during the Year and events of 4th Ninja War, which only thing contradicting his age is there Public Apology on Card and also re-released the Card and changed 17 to 16 on new version of Card which is incorrect, also in Gaara Hiden Novel which is 3 years after 4th Ninja War and a few Months after Naruto and Hinata’s wedding, it’s stated Gaara is 20.

Said to be 20 in Gaara Hiden Novel Chapter 1 Page 21-Page 22.

Said to be 20 in Gaara Hiden Novel in Timeline Publication of Shinden novels, Boruto Novels and Retsuden Novels.

Graduated Academy at 12 and became Genin and Promoted to Chunin at 14 in 3rd Databook.

Chapter 97 Gaara states for the past 6 years ever since he turned 6 his father has been trying to assassinate him and has lost count of how many he’s made. He also says when he turned 6 they determined that he was too great a liability, prior to that he had merely been handled with care, like any other hazardous instrument.

In chapter 57 the 3 sand siblings team beat Itachi’s forest of death record which was 5hrs and 37mins and completed the 2nd exam in 97 mins, in Chapter 58 it’s stated they beat the previous record by four hours which was itachi’s revealed in Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light.

Said in 4th Databook that 4 years ago A friend who knows the same pain from Chapter 136, when Gaara was 13.

In Chapter 131, Gaara edges the Kanji for Love on to his head with his Sand.

Gaara’s Birthday Column From Naruto Official Site.

Ninja Number 56-001

Rank Kazekage.

Note: Ittetsu said to be 16 in 3rd Databook Character detail list in Chapter 280 when Chiyo Revived Gaara.

Note: Abiru said to be 6 in 2nd Databook in chapter 129 when Gaara was 6.

Note: Tsuchino said to be 6 in 2nd Databook in chapter 129 when Gaara was 6.

Note: Tomari said to be 6 in 2nd Databook in chapter 129 when Gaara was 6.

Note: Kashike said to be 6 in 2nd Databook in chapter 129 when Gaara was 6.

Notes: Karin said to be 17 During 4th Ninja war in the 4th Databook Page 084.

Said to be 16 in 3rd Databook.

Note: Suigetsu said to be 17 in 4th Databook.

Said to be 16 in 3rd Databook.

Notes: Omoi was said to be 16 during 4th Ninja war in 4th Databook Page 071 and 4th ninja war ended in Oct he turns 17 in Dec.

Notes: Karui was said to be 17 during 4th Ninja war in 4th Databook.

Note: Flashback of Gaara’s birth Chapter 547, Gaara is the 3rd child of Rasa and the only one compatible with 1 tails, tailed beast and becomes the 3rd Jinjuriki of 1 tails.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Chapter 1 Section 1 Page 19-20, Itachi at 5 something significant had changed and shaken his heart, that something was before his eyes at that moment, Mikoto says lying on her back on the floor, said so, Itachi didn’t respond and instead sat, legs tucked underneath him, staring at the creature laying before his knees, the tiny new born baby seemed to be intently focused on understanding his situation, while his still unseeing eyes wandered around empty space, Itachi gently touched the baby’s cheek, at sudden stimulus, the infant twitched with surprise, shocked by this reaction, Itachi pulled his hand away, while his mother giggled as she watched, Sasuke the child’s name, his own little brother, Sasuke Uchiha, Itachi gently touched the baby’s cheek one more time, Sasuke, the Moment he gave voice to his brother’s name for the first time, something was exploded in his heart, different from love he felt for his mother and father, a special, indescribable emotion, in the end 5 year old Itachi couldn’t really put into words just what it was, but faced with ephemeral life, a creature who seemed like he would shatter if Itachi even touched him, something like a masculine sense of responsibility did indeed come to life inside him, the feeling that he had to protect this tiny life, Take care of your baby brother, his mother said and Itachi nodded fiercely, hand still on Sasuke’s cheek.

Note: Mianto flashback of Kushina pregnant, in Chapter 664.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 5 Section 6, Shisui says he killed his good friend with his hand, it was a little before he met Itachi, he met a boy at the Academy he could call a friend, he fought alone side him, after he became Genin too, on the same team, back then he was his best friend, they trusted each other but that didn’t even last a year, This was right after the war ended, Missions were way harsher than they are now, they were in the middle of a mission with a few other teams to clean up after the war, and they ended up by ourselves in another Land, they’re luck was bad, they ran into more enemies than they could handle, they were staring right at death, this tale was from before Itachi became a ninja, Fortunately, some of the comrades they got separated from found them, They saved him, but his friend was slow to run, If he had just reached out to him, he wouldn’t have had to die, The difference between life and death was determined by a slight difference in luck, and that bit of luck had divided the 2 boys, It definitely hadn’t been his fault, But Shisui regretted his friend’s death as if it were a crime he had committed, Shisui says he envied that friend, He was blessed with more talent than him, he was jealous of him, always running out in front of him, So that time, he could have reached out his hand, But he deliberately didn’t he killed him, For several months, he was completely destroyed by the fact that he killed him, It was then, When he met Itachi.

Note: Flashback of Jiraiya at Minato’s house showing him his book of a gutsy ninja and Minato tells him kushina is pregnant and he wants to name his son after the character, in Chapter 382.

Note: Itachi: Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 1 Section 2, Itachi meets Shisui after Sasuke is born on 23rd of July and before 9 tails attack on 10th of October.

Note: 9 Tails Attack on 10th of October, the day Naruto was Born.

Note: Flashbacks of Naruto’s birth and 9 tails attack in chapter 1-2, 370, 386, 399, 500-504, 544, 568, 607, 637, 642, 644, Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Chapter 1 Section 2.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Chapter 1 Section 3, Izumi says her father died in the 9 tails attack, her father wasn’t an Uchiha and after her father died they went back to the Clan, and she was with her father when he died, right in front of her, he was protecting her, and During the funeral, the whole time after that, she blamed herself, If only she had more power, then suddenly her eyes started throbbing inside her eyes, and her chakra gathered there, she fainted, when she woke up her mother Hazuki told her it was the Sharigan, she awakened it.

Note: Itachi Shinden Chapter 6 Section 2, Yoji says do you know Naruto, though imperfect he’s the son of the 4th Hokage, don’t you think it’s strange that because 9 tails is housed in that body, everybody treats him so cruelly, Itachi said Danzo, Yoji says yes Danzo did one thing, he simply made it known that the 9 tails that plunged the village into terror, was housed in the body of that child, the people of the village then made their own judgements, and decided to discriminate against Naruto, with this terrifying child, as their just cause, they shifted responsibility to someone else and now the people turn a cold shoulder to Naruto, and by looking down on the poor child, the main emotional equilibrium, your Clan fulfils a small role to Naruto, isn’t that so, Itachi says you’re saying Danzo is also pulling the strings behind the Uchiha discrimination too, Yoji says that is an enmity before Danzo was born, it’s not good to make everything his fault.

Note: Flashback of Baby Naruto wrapped up, in Chapter 122, 382.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 2 Section 1 Page 56, Shinko says she moved house to Konoha 3 years ago.

Note: 1st Fanbook Page 144, it’s said in Shinobi Training Grounds, Konoha Academy History: Half the Buildings Destroyed in Nine-Tailed Fox Attack.

Note: Hiruzen Returns as Hokage.

Year 49:

(Land of Wind)

Sari,

Note: Sari said to be 15 in 3rd Databook Character detail list in Chapter 280 when Chiyo Revived Gaara.

Note: Hiruzen has a Flashback of Iruka as kid, in Chapter 122.

Iruka has Flashback at his parent’s grave with Hiruzen a year after their deaths on their anniversary which is the 10th of Oct, in Chapter 139.

Note: 1st Fanbook Page 144, it’s said in Shinobi Training Grounds, Konoha Academy History: Half the Buildings Destroyed in Nine-Tailed Fox Attack, Rebuilt One Year Later.

Year 50:

(Land of Fire)

Koji, Daichi, Nobori, Matsuri,

Note: Koji said to be 10 in 1st Databook.

Note: Daichi said to be 10 in 1st Databook.

Note: Nobori said to be 10 in 1st Databook.

Note: Matsuri said to be 10 in 1st Databook.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 1 Section 3, Itachi at 6 starts Academy and it's stated after 6 months of starting the Academy, Itachi's fame spread through the school, and he excelled to such an extent that some teachers and students said his level of talent had never been at the school, and given the fact that the 1st year classes had nothing to teach him, his teachers gave him special homework and tests, but he easily mastered it all, and his teachers threw up their hands in defeat, he was more than advanced enough for the Genin level, and so just over four months after he started school, his teachers unanimously agreed on his graduation after his 1st year, and the Leaf Village exhausted from the 3rd Ninja War and the 9 tails attack, urgently needed ninja because of the selected number of Students judged by their teachers to be particularly gifted could take the graduation exam without waiting for their full term to be up, if they passed the exam, they would then attend the graduation ceremony with the older students, and be assigned duties as Genin, and Naturally Itachi passed the graduation exam, it was Clone Techniques, something he mastered with the instructions he got from Shisui before he started the Academy, Itachi has 6 months of school left, his graduation had already been settled. Danzo tossed the white file onto his desk which says Itachi Uchiha with and picture of him attached to it and that the academy has never before witnessed such genius, and he completed the graduation examination 4 months after he commenced his studies, and he is scheduled to graduate in the Springtime of the next Year.

If Itachi started Academy at 6 and its stated when he's been in academy for 6 months and will graduate in 6 months in the Springtime of the next year and will graduate after his 1st Year, which means he started Academy at 6 in Springtime likely April like Japanese Schools and turned 7 in June.

Note: tachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 1 Section 3 it's stated Itachi's been in Academy for 3 months in Page 35, and in Page 38 it's said it had been Just over a year since they moved to the new compound, and in Page 39 it's said Shisui started to draw attention as a Genin being called Shisui of the body flicker.

Note: Sasuke playing with his toys and Itachi returns from Ninja Academy and Sasuke jumps into his arms and they go play hide and seek, in Chapter 402.

Note: Chapter 619 Hiruzen Flashback of Itachi at 7 and says he thought quite like a Hokage.

Note: Kabuto leaves Orphanage with Danzo at 9 after spending 3 years at Orphanage, in Chapter 583.

Note: Orochimaru leaves leaf after Hiruzen finds out about his inhuman experiment's, it's Stated in Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Chapter 6 Section 7, that when Itachi joins the Akatsuki and meets Orochimaru that they last saw each other 9 years which Itachi kills clan at 12 Turning 13 that year so they last saw each other when Itachi was 4 when the 3rd ninja war ended and Itachi says Orochimaru left the village 6 years ago which Itachi was 7, it’s 2 years after the 4th Hokage Minato died, in Chapter 121-122 it shows flashback of 3rd Hokage Hiruzen and his anbu trying to stop Orochimaru and trying to capture him, which Orochimaru states in Chapter 121 in the Decade since I left the Village I've struggled. In Chapter 237, Flashback of Jiraiya trying to stop Orochimaru when he's trying to leave the village.

Chapter 116 lbiki Explains Why Orochimaru Left the Leaf Village and says Back in the Day, when They were selecting the 4th Hokage, Orochimaru Supposedly put Forth his Own Name for Consideration, Though Ultimately he wasn't Chosen, Shortly After that he Ran from the Village, Orochimaru Probably Resented the 3rd Hokage Hiruzen ever Since.

Note: 1st Fanbook Page 144, it’s said in Shinobi Training Grounds, Konoha Academy History: 10 Years Ago, Third Expansion.

Year 51:

(Land of Fire)

Mukai Kohinata Child, Hibari, Futaba,

(Land of Lightning)

Ponta,

(Land of Waves)

Akane,

Note: Mukai Child said to be 3 in Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 3 Section 4 Page 122, Itachi was 11 and Mukai their father was 34.

Note: Hibari said to be 9 in 1st Databook.

Note: Futaba said to be 9 in 1st Databook.

Note: Ponta said to be 14 in 4th Databook Character detail list in chapter 468, he's Sabuchan's partner.

Note: Akane said to be 9 in 1st Databook.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 1 Section 4, Itachi reads the scroll in a sonorous voice before slowly rolling it back up, and then he turned his gaze out over the sea of graduates and current students, guardians and teachers, below him, Valedictorian, Itachi Uchiha, his grades had all been nothing but perfect from the day he started school until his graduation, he a had passed the graduation exam in his 4 month at the school, although there had been some exceptional graduates during the urgent days of the Great War, such as Kakashi Hatake, Itachi was the Youngest Post-War graduate and Valedictorian, the Majority of the graduate’s were 12 years old, there were some who, like Itachi, had managed excellent grades and were younger graduate’s, but at 7, Itachi was indeed far too Young. Even if he did have the Grades the thinking, and the ninja skills far beyond his 7 years, there was concern that he was simply too immature to hold up before the other graduate’s and there was one more thing, there were complaints about the facts that Itachi had been born into the Uchiha clan, mainly from the teachers with lineages connected to the Senju Clan, in the end, however they bowed before his overwhelming abilities and grades, and the way he excelled in all things, despite the issues of his age and the prejudice towards the Uchiha’s , there could be no other valedictorian.

If Itachi started Academy at 6 and its stated when he’s been in academy for 6 months and will graduate in 6 months in the Springtime of the next year and will graduate after his 1st Year, which means he Graduated at 7 in Springtime likely in mid-late March like Japanese school which he would turn 8 in June and he started Academy at 6 in Springtime likely April like Japanese Schools and turned 7 in June.

It’s also stated in 1st Databook, 2nd Databook and 3rd Databook that he Graduated at 7.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 2 Section 1, Itachi at 7 turning 8 joins Team 2/ Yuki with Tenma and Shinko which Yuki is their Squad Leader.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 2 Section 2, Team 2/ Yuki on a their 1st mission and it was discovered that one of the vegetable peddlers who came and went from Konoha was a spy for Iwagakure and Team 2/ Yuki had been given the order to dispose of him, and so they left the village to find him, normally it was Anbu’s job to eliminate intelligence agents from enemy nations, but the Anbu were all currently busy with the certain urgent mission, not one member remained in the village, the attempted kidnapping of Hinata Hyuga.

Note: Flashback of Neji getting Curse Mark at 4, when Hinata turned 3, in Chapter 102-103.

Note: Hyuga incident happened when Hinata was 3, Flashbacks From Chapter 102 and 105.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 2 Section 2, Hyuga incidnet with the head ninja of the Village of Kumogakure attempted to kidnap Hianata Hyuga, which shortly after Itachi goes with Fugaku to his regular meetings and Fugaku says Itachi his son is 7 and says although he has the Genin status required to take part in the these meeting, he is still very much a novice, due to his admittedly selfish desire to have him learn about the Clan status from a young age, he has been allowed to take part, he appreciates there understanding and bowed his head, in response the clan members sitting before him bowed their heads simultaneously and then picked up where they left last time, and discuss the issues of the submission of a written opinion to the Hoakge, with regard to the segregation of the Clan’s Compound.

Which Itachi should be 8 When the Hyuga Incident Happened because it happened on her 3rd birthday which her birthday is in December and Itachi would’ve turned 8 in June and he Graduated at 7 in Springtime so he would be 8 when he went to Uchiha meeting with Fugaku not 7.

Year 52:

(Land of Fire)

Konohamaru Sarutobi 30th Dec, Moegi Kazamatsuri 8th of June, Udon Ise 3rd of April,

(Land of Waves)

Inari 25th of Dec,

(Land of Lightning)

King,

Notes: Konohamaru said to be 12 During 4th War in 4th Databook Page 101 and would turn 13, 2 months after after 4th war which took place in Oct.

Said to be 8 in 1st Databook.

Said to be 9 in 2nd Databook.

Said to be 12 in 3rd Databook.

Konohamaru Datacard / Ninja Encyclopaedia Entry 11 in Boruto Chapter 13.

Was in a Team with Udon and Moegi in Team Ebisu.

Ninja Number 012707.

Rank Jonin.

Note: Moegi said to be 8 in 1st Databook.

Said to be 12 in 4th Databook Character detail list so during 4th war she's 13.

Moegi Datacard / Ninja Encyclopaedia Entry 12 in Boruto Chapter 14.

Was in a Team with Konohamaru and Udon in Tema Ebisu.

Note: Udon said to be 8 in 1st Databook.

Said to be 12 in 4th Databook Character detail list so during 4th war he's 13.

Was in a Team with Konohamaru and Moegi in Tema Ebisu.

Note: Inari said to be 12 in 4th Databook but doesn't turn 13 until after the 4th Ninja war so he would be turning 13 after the 4th war ends.

Said to be 8 in 1st Databook.

Said in Kakashi Hiden Novel Prologue Page 19, that Inari is Supposedly 14.

Said in Chapter 11 by Tazuna that his Grandson is 10 years old while the 1st Databook contradicts that and 4th Databook backs up the 1st Databook.

Note: King said to be 13 in 4th Databook character detail list chapter 492 when Naruto arrives to Land of lightning Turtle Island.

Note: Flashback of Choji meeting Shikamaru and Shinta not letting Choji play ninja, in Chapter 190.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 2 Section 3, it coming up a year since Itachi had Graduated from the Academy and Itachi turned 8 and his career as ninja was going smoothly, and haven’t been sent on any particular difficult missions, and looking back on his his year, the mission 1st accomplished after becoming a Genin, that of taking care of the Iwagakure spy, was maybe the hardest he’d been on, and his relationship with team mates was the same as always, Tenma still wouldn’t accept him, and Shinko flared up, annoyed with Tenma’s attitude, Yuki watched over them half in panic, and Itachi didn’t do anything special, but simply stood there on his own, he thought he was a bit of an unnatural, warped team but even so, do the same thing over and over for a year, and it became the norm, even if they were still unable to really open up with each other, they somehow managed to execute their missions without a fuss, and Itachi was satisfied with that, he had no intentions of hanging around for that long, instead of spending his precious time worrying about his teammates or his Jonin supervisor, he poured his heart into polishing his own skills, so naturally, he had mastered ninjutsu to the extent that missions went almost too smoothly, if he had one bone to pick, it would be the fact Yuki hadn’t recommended him for the Chunin Selection Exams that year, Ostensibly, this was because Tenma and Shinko still hadn’t reached the level where they could take the Chunin exams, participation in the Chunin exams was based on the three person Cell/ Squad, when Itachi learned of this he pressed Yuki about it, and normally whatever was said to him he doesn’t bother to react but just this once Yuki pushed back against Itachi forcefully, he insisted it was, simply impossible that year, with a look on his face that was said he wasn’t the least bit interested in what Itachi had to say, Itachi had no choice but to give up, but even if he wasn’t allowed to take Chunin exams, he could still be promoted directly to Chunin if the Village administration and the Jonin recommend it, and looking at Team 2/ Yuki’s results, it was immediately obvious just how much Itachi contributed to the team, it was a fact that his judgement surpassed that of even his supervising Jonin, and he had reached the highest level in everything from ninja arts to fighting techniques, all of which had allowed him to rescue his team from danger any number of times, which Itachi has the belief firmly in his heart that the administration will definitely say something and he pushed on with the mission before him each day.

Since the Lands have all relaxed now that the War is over, so travel between countries is much safer now, which is why they can assign this sort of mission to a Genin cantered team, and the team gets a document on their mission to guard the Daimyo of the Land of Fire, which the Land of Fire’s Daimyo visits the Leaf Village annually, which is a regular event and was extremely important to both sides, one that had been faithfully held, even during the Great War, Team 2/ Yuki had been assigned to guard the Fire Daimyo on his trip, which there will also be a 4 person Anbu team behind the scenes keeping an eye from the shadows, and before that even, the Daimyo has his own 12 Guardian Ninja, an independent corps made up of only the most skilled ninja in the land, so they are like a formality, the roads are quite safe since the end of the Great War, so the with Genin who distinguished themselves the most during the year is selected to guard the Daimyo, which the assignment is a great honour, Yuki says they’ll meet tomorrow morning at 4, at the A-un main gates and don’t be late, Next Day guarding the daimyo he says he knows he says this every year but Konoha is so far and around him were 2 of the 12 Guardian Ninjas and a dozen or so attendants, and itachi’s team 2/ Yuki, spread out in loose circle, a main road led from the Capital of Land of Fire to Konoha, they had already covered half the distance, and the village was just up ahead , and then Itachi said to Yuki, the Daimyo which the 2, 12 Guardian Ninja grabbed the the Daimyo from either side and lifted him into the palanquin, and the 4 members of team 2/ Yuki stepped out in front of the Daimyo’s party and spread out in a Diamond formation with Yuki at the tip, and the 4 started at the mask man with a bizarre mask that the surface was blunt orange with horizontal black stripes at uneven intervals, and a jet black hollow around the right eye which allowed the man to see, which Itachi;s instints telling him there was something ominous about this man, Yuki asked the masked man how did he get on the road when it’s closed, and the masked man used Genjutsu, Yuki has frozen in place, the Daimyo and his close aides, and the 2 Guardian Ninjas had also been caught in the Genjutsu, and Itachi avoided being caught in the Genjutsu and Tenma charged at the man as he ran he glanced at Itachi and said his speciality is Genjutsu and that he can’t get him with that technique and he thrust a kunai into his throat and his arm was sucked into the mans throat and shot out the back of his head, his arm passed right through his body and Tenam his body flew up into the air and the fulcrum was the masked man’s arm, which pierced Tenma’s body, this time it was no illusion, as proof blood gushed from the boy’s torso, flowing to the ground like a waterfall, Tenma convulsed in tiny seizures, but gradually grew quieter, until he finally stopped moving completely and the man forcefully shook the arm that penetrated Tenma, and the corpse slid off and hit the ground, Masked Man sensed the Chakra of Kakashi Hatake and the Masked Man was sucked into a hole and disappeared, as Itachi was dumbfounded 4 figures dropped down from the sky above, they wore animal masks, the Anbu, an elite group under the direct control of the Hokage, the shortest of the 4 a boy with grey hair in a fox mask asked Iatchi if he was all right and shook him by the shoulders and asked what happened, the other 3 were going around releasing the Daimyo and the others from the Genjutsu, Itachi started vacantly at the fox mask boy, Kakashi Hatake, the boy said how do you know that name, Itachi instinctively knew that the boy in front of him was Kakashi, even with a warmth of a blanket around his body, he couldn’t stop shaking, the mans attack felt like a memory of a distant day, but it had only happened a few hours earlier, given the urgent nature of the situation.

The Daimyo’s visit was postponed, and he returned that day to the Land of Fire, after hearing reports from the Anbu and Yuki, The Hokage and other village officials decided to have Itachi report in a few days, he was sent home immediately after he returned to the village, he didn’t feel like doing anything, he couldn’t muster an interest in even easting supper, he just lay there under his blankets, despite the fact that it was still early in the evening, even Sasuke was awake, Itachi wrapped himself alone in his blankets, and endured the incessant shaking, in his heart was a disappointment with himself, Tenam died, right in front of him, he was the only one who could have saved Tenma and yet, he hadn’t been able to do anything, Itachi could heard his parents talking which his fathers words pushed through the warmth of the blankets and pierced his heart, he was lacking and he was not good enough yet, he wanted more power to defeat that Masked Man and go beyond him, and go beyond anyone in this world and he felt something beneath his tightly closed eyelids something hot and throbbing, he felt a pounding at the nape of his neck, and then something hot like fire shot through his body and concentrated around pounding, before pouring into his eyes, Itachi Finally realised that the source of this blazing power was chakra, those born into the Uchiha Clan were cloaked in a chakra with fire attributes, but he never before in his life experienced this kind of heat from his chakra, still he managed to coolly asses what was occurring within his own body, eyes closed, he pushed the blankets off and sat up in his futon, before gradually opening his eyes, Awakening, the world was coloured in red, everything was different from the scene of only moments ago, on the other side of the sliding doors, 3 flames of different sizes flickered, the lives of his father, mother and Sasuke and he slowly lifted his lids again the world had returned to normal, the sharigan and Itachi remembered the Mask Man the eye in that small hole in the mask, he remembered 3 magatama floating in that red iris and he said the Masked Man won’t beat him next time.

it’s said Itachi is 8 but he’s 8 turning 9 that year, it said it was coming up a year since Itachi had Graduated from the Academy and had his 1st mission which he Graduated at 7 turning 8 that year, which it must be Springtime, near March if it’s coming up to be a year.

Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 2 Section 4, Itachi is on a Mission to secure the man and put the fear of the ninja in him that was their mission, he’s from Land of Fire that sneaked into Konoha and can’t misrepresent his history just because he wants to be a ninja and Yuki says Itachi is 9 and Itachi meets his 2 new squad mates, Tenma’s death forced Shinko to confront the reality of the callous nature of the world of ninja, breaking her spirit, so she resigned as a ninja and now works in a tea shop in the village, it had been just over 3 months since they started doing nothing but D -Rank Missions and was training himself to master the Sharigan through these sort of missions, the new girl on his team Himuka called Itachi master even though she was 4 years older than him, the other new teammate was a boy, it had been three months since he joined team 2/ Yuki, but Itachi has never once see him talk, his name was Yoji, and he was from the the Aburame Clan, but so far Itachi hasn’t seen him use insects.

Itachi and shisui train and had been sparring seriously for 3 hours or so, as a way for Itachi to vent his anger with is assignments, they had already gone 15 rounds, with breaks of about 3 minutes after each one, resulting in 6 wins for Itachi and 9 for Shisui only rule was no Sharigan, everything else fair game, Sharigan was off limits because the visual technique uses up large amount of chakra and they wanted to spar for as long as possible and then Shisui says regretfully you win, in the end they sparred 35 mintues and the result was 11 wins for Itachi , and 24 wins for Shisui, and Shisui says to Itachi he’s beyond Genin level already, and is his Chunin Exam being put off again this year, Itachi replied saying yeah and then Shisui asks Itachi about Izumi awkwardly changing the topic and Itachi turned wide eyes on him, and Shisui says its hard to figure out what you’re thinking, but he guess this at least, is pretty easy, Itachi says what do you mean, Shisui says go look in the mirror, a playful smile spreading across his face, Itachi says he doesn’t have an opinion on her either way, Shisui says yet the minute he said her name Izumi you looked like you had a pretty strong opinion, Itachi thought maybe Izumi was different but whatever his feelings for her were they didn’t seem romantic, he didn’t know either so he changed to subject to Shisui’s father, and Shisui said don’t change the subject with a grin, and then says his had lost the leg in the last Ninja war which was the 3rd Ninja War and he had fallen ill because of that injury, and he was currently the bedridden, Shisui lived alone with his mother and father, and was the family breadwinner, his father has gotten weaker lately and he’s stopped recognising him, and he’s ready for his death.

Danzo says he saw the line-up for this years Chunin Exam says to Hiruzen it seems that Itachi Uchiha is not on the list once more, it is a loss for the village to make someone with such promising future waste several years, Hirzuen frowned saying but he can’t take the exams without the recommendation of his supervising Jonin, which Yuki is below average among Jonin and Dazno says he’s likely jealous of Itachi’s abilities and says perhaps your unaware of this Hiruzen but he’s sent back several Genin more talented than himself back to academy he cant do that this time, because Itachi is obviously excels, the boy’s name is known through the village, Hiruzen sighs and says if Yuki won’t recommend him, then we can simply promote Itachi to Chunin though an official decision, Danzo says its better for the village to have him take the exams, the Chunin exams is a place where the official’s from all the countries come together in the same room, which is to say, it’s an opportunity to display the future fighting potential of each Land, if we demonstrate Itachi’s abelites there, it will enhance the threat our village poses to other countries, Itachi returns home to 4 year old Sasuke standing in the hallway and patted his head, the door slides open his father’s room, with a sour look on his afce and stood in front of Itachi and said Lord Hokage called him in today to talk about you, on the recommendation of village official’s, he wants you to take the Chunin exams next year, the other examines will be working in groups, naturally, this will put you in a difficult situation, Fugaku closed his eyes and lowered his face for a moment before lifting it again to look straight at Itachi and said but he told Lord Hokage that he would take part, and the village official’s recommended him directly, instead of his supervising Jonin, so make sure you do it right and apparently it was Danzo Shimura who pushed hard for him to take the Chunin exams.

Year 53:

(Land of Fire)

Hanabi Hyuga 27th of March, Mukai Kohinata Child, Hinoko/Soku,

(Land of Waves)

Ageha,

Note: Hanabi said to be 7 in 1st Databook, Hinata is 12 making her 5 years younger than Hinata.

Note: Mukai Child said to be 1 in Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Chapter 3 Section 4 Page 122, When itachi was eleven and when Mukai their father was 34.

Note: Hinoko said to be 14 in Bland Period Shikamaru Hiden: A Cloud Drifting in Silent Darkness Novel Chapter 1 Section 5 and Chapter 2 Section 2, when Shikamaru is 19.

Note: Ageha said to be 7 in 1st Databook.

Note: it's stated in Naruto the Last: Naruto the Movie Novel Prologue in Page 11-13, when Naruto met Hinata and saved her from bullies in March when it was snowing when they were preparing to enter the academy, which in Chapter 75 Kiba states Naruto has been in Academy for 3 years and he's normally always with Akamaru which Akamaru isn't born until Kiba's 9 so Naruto must be 8 which means Naruto was 4 turning 5 when he met Hinata and preparing to enter the academy.

Note: Naruto the Last: Naruto the Movie Chapter 4 Page 139, Naruto in Memory Bubble Genjutsu and has a flashback of meeting Hinata and saving her from the 3 boys bullying her.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 3 Section 1, Itachi takes the first stage of the Chunin Exam which is a written test the questions are intended to be difficult for genin to answer so they have to cheat without being caught, but Itachi thought the written test was easy so and had seen at the start the point was to use ninja techniques to cheat without getting caught by the examiner’s and had confidence in his strength of his memory, ever since he was little he had read books in between bouts of training to develop his ninja techniques, that habit never changed when he started the academy, or after becoming a Genin, so he had all kinds of knowledge ticked away in his brain, like the history of the ninja continuing from the Sage of 6 Paths and Alliances, treaties, laws of uniformity among the different lands, Fundamentals, advanced techniques, practical strategies in fighting, Theory on physical ninja arts, kekkei genkai, Introduction to chakra, Tailed beast, ninja beasts, Overview of sage barriers and natural energy fundamentals, and many other documents, books, theses, Thus, there was no need for him to cheat. completes the test on his own, Itachi after finishing his test observes the other examines as one after another was ordered to leave, suspected of cheating which they were using there best techniques they were best at to cheat, everyone was his enemy so he studied their skills, he would be able to choose the most advantageous circumstances when they fought, Itachi was on his own while everyone else were in 3 man squads, obtaining information now on his enemies was an important fight for him, in order to turn the tables in an unfavourable situation.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 3 Section 2, Itachi ends up getting the 2nd Highest Score in the written Exams History only beaten by Minato the record holder.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 3 Section 1, Itachi takes the 2nd Exam same day as 1st exam which teams have 5 days to reach centre of Forest of Death with two scrolls in their possession which being the Earth scroll and the Heaven scroll and when Exam starts, Itachi at 2nd Exam before it starts encounters a team of 3 Mist ninjas, which the boy that looks 15-16 says not like you can surround the 3 of us, with a grin on his face, Itachi dropped his eyes to the scroll in his hand, another boy behind him shouted taking the chunin Exam by yourself is suicide, then a girl started laughing, the 3 of them were Mist ninja, the boy had the scroll that paired with the one Itachi has in his hand, the scroll had Earth written on it.

On the 1st day he was suddenly attack by the enemy the mist ninja before him, Rather than making the foolish move of searching for the matching scroll, Itachi was heading straight for the tower. Just like he wanted the Earth scroll, his opponents wanted the Heaven scroll. If he moved toward the tower, his opponent would certainly come to him. It was just as he planned, and the Mist Ninja have already confirmed that Itachi has the heaven scroll, he deliberately carried his scroll openly to lure in another team into attacking him as he went to the tower and these 3 mist ninja fell for his trap and he is confronted by a team of 3 Mist ninjas, one of the boys names is Kiruru and he takes their scroll and knocks them out so they won’t follow him and he completes the 2nd Exam in 5hrs and 37mins a new Record.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 3 Section 1, the 3rd Exam is the Final Exam and is a one on one matches between participants and Itachi is scheduled to fight a Konoha ninja in his 1st match but his opponent withdraws rather than face him, his 2nd match is against Nemui Shunmino a Cloud ninja which his ability to fight while sleeping enables him to instinctively dodge all attacks and his eyes closed prevents genjutsu after several minutes Nemui briefly wakes up to see how the fight is going and Itachi quickly uses sharigan to show him visions of his own gruesome death which he repeats every time he wakes up to the point Nemui is too frightened to fall asleep and forfeits and his wails of fear frightened the audience to a degree leaving Danzo only to applaud Itachi’s victory.

Itachi Shinden: Bright Light Chapter 3 Section 2 Itachi was scheduled to have a final 3rd match but the Exam officials decide his performance up to this point has more than qualified from promotion to Chunin at 10 and the Uchiha’s celebrate at their next meeting and the other Uchiha’s suggest Itachi to join the police force, Fugaku was no intention of letting Itachi in the police force and instead wants to break tradition instead of Itachi joining the Police Force he wants him to join the Anbu.

Itachi makes his way home making an appearance at the Hokage residence to take care of his procedures for his Chunin promotion, he hears a girl say master Itachi and standing before him is a girl he had seen before, older than he was, the girl who had been his teammate until 6 months earlier, Himuka Suzukage and she congratulated him on his promotion, and he asked if she was still on the team with Yoji, she said he transferred somewhere else, the same time it was decided that Itachi would be taking the Chunin exam, Itachi thought something felt weird about this and what kind of transfer happens so suddenly, only one thing he could think of the Anbu, but Yoji just made Genin and Itachi couldn’t remember him ever doing anything vaguely amazing when they were in missions, Himuka says she’s working hard with master Yuki and the team has 2 new teammates.

Year 54:

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 3 Section 3, Danzo and Hiruzen talking about Itachi and how he became Chunin 5 months ago and has carried out his missions almost too perfectly, Even on missions using Genin, he has such a grasp on each of their areas of specialisation, and gives such impeccable orders, it's hard to believe he's only 12, the reports he sends in, too, are very nicely in order, strictly following the format, Danzo says so those 2 years as Genin were a loss to both Itachi and the Village, Hiruzen says better to think of it as necessary experience, Hiruzen says Fugaku head of the military force made an interesting proposal, he sounded out the idea of Itachi joining the Anbu, and Fugaku said to him Itachi want be able to use his abilities to the fullest in the Military Police Force and so he came to him about the boy joining the Anbu, both Homura and Koharu opposed on this they said it’s preposterous to have an Uchiha in the Anbu, given its status as a special unit under the direct control of the Hokage, they asked him if he’s forgotten about how the 2nd Hokage established the Military Police Force, the Military Police Force was created to drive the Uchiha clan away from the central functions of the village, Homura and Koharu, of the Konoha Council, they were also acquaintances of his since childhood, old people with no great talent who had not stood out in any way during the harder times of the fierce Great War, when so many of their comrades died, they had managed to live such long lives through luck alone, but they had the self-awareness at least to know that they should gratefully accept the honorary positions on the Council, they didn't have the power to push their own opinions through without leaning on someone with a bigger, more authoritative, voice, and then Danzo didn’t oppose on Itachi joining the Anbu, Fugaku's proposal was a godsend, right from the start, he had planned for Itachi to join the Anbu, whatever he had to do to make it happen, Itachi Uchiha was an essential element in fulfilling Danzo's ambitions, so much so, that Danzo feared that Fugaku would harden in suspicion when he recommended the Anbu, the fact that the proposal had come from that side was nothing other than a windfall, and Danzo says Itachi is the sort of ninja you see maybe once every hundred years even if he’s an Uchiha we cannot afford to not take this advantage of everything he has to offer the village, Hiruzen says if you approve, then he has no objections to Itachi joining the Anbu, either, To eliminate this rivalry between the village and the Uchiha’s, they need to first win over the hearts of the young people, bringing Itachi into the centre of village life should be a good opportunity for that, but Itachi’s 11 they need to see he’s ready for the Anbu, so a mission to join the Anbu, it’s been 5 months since he’s been Chunin Itachi was order to take a longish break of a week and Fugaku also told him to take a break from training with Shisui that week.

It’s said Itachi is 11 and only been Chunin For 5 months but he’s only 10 when he became Chunin and the Exams normally start about July time, so he should be 10 turning 11 that year.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 3 Section 3 Page 115, Itachi having no other choice he was force to kill time with playing with 6 year old Sasuke and helping him with his training before he started the Academy, after Itachi had spent three days watching over Sasuke like this, his father told him to go out and talk with someone his own age, You're tired, take some time and enjoy this vacation, If you do, you'll stop saying things like that, Izumi ask’s Itachi does he wanna take a break over there and pointed at a tea shop ahead of them, and left the Clan compound and come into the center of the village, Itachi wasn't worried about what people would think seeing them together like this, he was taking a walk with a friend, there was nothing else to it, Two, please Izumi called out, and sat down on a long bench in front of the shop, where a scarlet carpet was laid out, Itachi sat beside her, and Shinko who works there says to Itachi it’s been ages and asked is that his girlfriend, Itachi says they’re friends, and Shinko says she bet she’s all disappointed now, teasing Itachi, and congratulated him on becoming Chunin, then someone was calling for her in the shop, she said right then, can’t be lazing about here, she’ll be back when she’s got there order sorted and she disappeared into the shop, Itachi said to Izumi you’re going to graduate this year right, she was 11, so her graduation was about a year early, it wasn’t as if she didn’t have talent herself, Izumi said that doesn’t count as talent you know, she noted sadly, Itachi asked Izumi why she wanted to be a ninja, she says her dad was a ninja, Itachi said is that the only reason, Izumi replied in declaration, and he caught a glimpse of her anger, in her black eyes beneath her eye lashes, he didn’t know what it meant, walking down the same path as the person you like, she stood up and looked back at Itachi to smile and tears were spilling out her eyes, she turned around and didn’t look back again, Shinko teased Itachi about making his girl cry, having come to stand behind him at some point.

It’s Said Izumi is 11 and she will be graduating this year which is a year early so Itachi would be 10 turning 11 since, the Academy Graduation is in Springtime Mid-late March which Itachi would turn 11 in June.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 3 Section 4, Itachi listening to Danzo, they are in the living room of the man, the leader of an organisation separate from the Hokage’s Anbu, the Foundation, the organisation ruled over by Danzo, it had affiliation with the Anbu, but a different command structure, the Foundation was an elite squad that recruited the finest in the village when they were still children, and faithfully carried out its work in the Shadows, to maintain peace from the darkness in the village, Itachi himself had only learned all of this after Danzo summoned him here, the majority of people in the village weren’t even aware of this existence of the foundation, Danzo had been Hiruzen’s right hand man since they were young, and most people thought of this man as something like an administrative official, who managed the surface of the Anbu, Danzo's rooms were in the depths of the building at the foot of the mountain with the Hokage Monument-the faces of previous Hokage-carved into it, located due north of the village. On the surface, the building was for the storage of documents and materials related to administration. Most people normally never went anywhere near it, the back gates, where the members of the Anbu slipped out of the village on missions, were nearby, It was a shadowed place, no light hitting it, even at midday. And this particular room was in the center of this dark place, so dark that although it was past noon, large candles burned in the four corners. In the flickering flames, Danzo appeared bewitchingly otherworldly, a statue of the Buddha in the middle of the night. Danzo says so you agree to join the Anbu, Itachi says yes, Bit by bit, he was starting to see clear signposts on the path he must walk in order to remove war from this world. First, he would join the Anbu. He would distinguish himself there, and establish himself as a central figure in the village, After that, Hokage, He would become Hokage, and get rid the village's prejudice toward the Uchihas, and Itachi's dreams didn't stop there, Once he was Hokage, he would be able to meet regularly with people of influence from other places, If he worked together with ninja from other villages, he should be able to eliminate ninja rivalry, Ninja would disappear from the world, Once there were no more ninja, the daimyos would lose their means of making war. What lay beyond that was a world without war or fighting, For Itachi's dreams, the Anbu, and becoming Hokage, were nothing more than checkpoints, First, step number one: join the Anbu, He had no time for the opposition of the village officials or the members of the Anbu.

He intended to overcome all resistance, Danzo says An achievement is required to show us whether or not you are suitable for the Anbu, Itachi says a mission, Danzo says precisely and I have been out in charge of giving you that mission, which means it will be a dark mission, Danzo says There is a man in the Anbu, age 34, and we have seen great talent in him, from the time he was a child, This man came up the ranks through genin and chunin without incident, and joined the Anbu at the same time as he was promoted to Jonin, But he cut himself off, and the flames in the four corners flickered together, Recently, we learned he has been colluding with Kirigakure, and those from the Anbu do the utmost to keep the village from learning their affiliation, on the surface this man lives an average life as a Jonin, he has a wife and 2 Children, ages 3 and 1, and Other than the fact that he was linked to Kirigakure, this man is capable, a great ninja, trusted by the Hokage himself, and Danzo instructed Itachi to kill this man and that family or no, gifted ninja or not, a traitor is a traitor. Danzo says  is likely obvious at this point, but he was convinced that the place he belong is the Anbu, he was permitted one comrade on this mission, he leaves the selection of that person to him, Take whoever he trust the most, and then Itachi tells Shisui about his mission and Itachi said When Danzo told me to take someone he trusted he thought of him and Mukai Kohinata is their target and his family are distantly related to the Hyuga Clan but they branch of several generations earlier, and Shisui tells Itachi that he was of the Anbu when the Masked Man attack the Daimyo and he was definitely following his Anbu orders, and that Mukai is good at physical techniques, and that if you follow his bloodline back, he would reach the Hyuga Clan, one of the most distinguished families in Konoha and if you trace the origins of the Hyuga he would arrive at the founder of the ninja, the Sage of 6 Paths, and the Byakugan Kekkai Genkai was visual justu on par with the Sharigan, the Hyuga can see the path of chakra circulating in the body and seal chakra by severing that pathway in someone who had became an enemy, their vision was said to reach out in all directions, with no blind spots, Once the pathway was sealed, the Hyuga clan used physical techniques, Their physical jutsu, known as Gentle Fist, aligned the flow of the user's chakra with the chakra extant in all living creatures, allowing the user to deliver a series of blows based on circular defensive movements, destroying anything inside their opponent's body, such as internal organs. Gentle Fist was a secret of the Hyuga clan, but given that they were a branch family, it was no stretch to imagine that at least some knowledge of it had been passed down to the Kohinata’s, Itachi says will you come with me, Shisui says of course and bumped his fist against Itachi’s chest, you got no one else you can trust right, Shisui says he’ll be Jonin of the Village and Itachi be Anbu, neither of them will join in the Military Police Force, they’ll be able to look at the Clan objectively, Shisui believed that Itachi will be the one to break through the hostile between the village and Clan as the 1st Uchiha Hokage, Itachi dream of being Hokage he never told anyone, a dream he never spoken of to his one and only friend Shisui, he hadn’t told anyone because he was afraid it would vanish in a cloud of smoke if he said it out loud.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 3 Section 5, Itachi and Sasuke playing Hide and Seek for Itachi it was a game, for Sasuke it was a serious contest and it’s stated Sasuke just turned 6 and would be entering the Academy soon in a few days, and he was full enthusiastic and he insisted to get a the tiniest bit stronger as a ninja before he started school, Itachi hadn’t even been given the chance to take his shoes off after his mission was over, before Sasuke was dragging him into the grove surrounding Naka Shrine, Sasuke, who had been whirling around in all directions, froze, and a single large shudder ran through his body, He had felt his brother's aura, The faint smile on Itachi's lips grew more distinct, It had been a minute flicker of chakra, the sort that an ordinary child definitely wouldn't have caught, But Sasuke had clearly sensed it, His talent as a ninja was unquestionable, he’s here, Sasuke, said to himself once more, Footfalls came straight at him, As they got closer, the pace changed to something more like bouncing, His brother's small feet stepped on the dry leaves as he advanced, and yet, his feet didn't make a sound, He could join the academy at that moment, and he could probably beat the older students, Found you Sasuke cried, shooting a finger out at the crouching Itachi, His little brother looked down at him, eyes glittering brightly with dreams and hope, Not quite, Itachi said, and disappeared in a puff of smoke, Shadow Clone, The real Itachi was above Sasuke's head, Itachi says to Sasuke they should go back and Sasuke says come on, one more hide and seek and Itachi says for give me Sasuke and poke’s his forehead, the 1st time he poked his forehead Sasuke was 3 years old.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Bright Light Novel Chapter 3 Section 5, Itachi working with 3 ninja teammates on a mission for the 1st time, he only knew one of them his target Mukai Kohinata, his target of Danzo’s assassination order, one member of the mixed Jonin/ Chunin team led by Mukai had been Injured in a day off, so there was suddenly an opening on the mission, and Itachi had been hurriedly brought in to help out, Itachi saw Danzo's shadow behind the chain of events that led to the chunin's injury, and his own selection, He could only assume that Danzo had used one of his own men to injure the chunin, and then intentionally had Itachi take his place, There was no other way the team his assassination target led would suddenly have a vacancy, and he himself would be brought in to fill it, Without a doubt, this was a silent message from Danzo to carefully study Mukai's skills, as they carried out the mission together, It's my fault, I'm sorry, the chunin to Itachi's immediate right said to Mukai's back, flying in front of him, Forget it, Mukai replied briefly, and moved indifferently through the trees, It was supposed to be a simple infiltration mission, Konoha had gotten a hold of the information that Sunagakure and Kirigakure were secretly trying to form a military alliance, In the event that Suna and Kiri went to war with the other villages, whatever the reason, they would be allies, In this time of peace, they would agree on the same hypothetical enemy, and cooperate to bring about the fall of the target village, A secret agreement, with the condition of war, The current peace was more or less maintained through the ninja villages, with each of the five great nations keeping each other in check, If two countries covertly joined hands and started to move toward a single fixed enemy, the peace would immediately crumble, and the days of war would return, To avoid this, Konoha absolutely had to prevent the secret treaty from being signed, Having learned that a Kirigakure representative would visit Sunagakure, Konohagakure ordered Mukai and his team to do reconnaissance on the meeting, They were to carefully investigate the details of the agreement, and report back. That was the whole mission, As long as the enemy didn't notice them, it was in no way difficult, Or at least, it shouldn't have been, Itachi and the others snuck into the residence of the 4th Kazekage, and watched over the meeting from the shadows, It ended with Suna and Kiri basically comparing their positions and making small moves toward each other, and Itachi's team moved to leave Sunagakure. But there, an unforeseen situation occurred, One of the chunin on their team was caught in a trap designed for intruders, Without a look back, the four started running, and now, they were somehow trying to escape their pursuers, The border's up ahead, Mukai noted, Now that they know Konoha knows about the secret agreement, the two countries can't move forward with things carelessly, The fact that we were found out is good for that, at least, he remarked to the chunin who had been fretting the whole time about being caught in the trap, The world opened up ahead of Itachi, They came out onto the plains and dropped from the trees to the ground, If they just kept running all the way to the border, they would definitely figure something out, Itachi stopped and turned around, Mukai was staring at the woods they had just slipped out of, He put a hand in his pocket, pulled out a cigarette, and lit the end of it, What are you doing, Itachi said, Ignoring Itachi, Mukai pulled a golden bottle from the back pocket of his trousers and brought it to his mouth, The sweet scent carried to Itachi by the wind told him that the bottle contained sake, Well, you just watch there, Mukai said, without looking back at Itachi, cigarette smouldering, The wild wind carried away the purple smoke, Even a village like Sunagakure, the majority of which was covered in sand, had a great deal of greenery near the border, Young grass stroked Mukai's legs as he braced himself,

We've already been found out, They're not going to let us get home unscathed, and He looked at Itachi over his shoulder, We do happen to have the famed Itachi Uchiha here with us, he’d like him to see what he can do, you know, Here they come, Mukai said, as several human forms danced out of the woods, There were more than twenty of them, Their pursuers quickly spotted Itachi and the others and formed a ring around them, Best not to touch them, Mukai put out his cigarette in a portable ashtray, and gulped back some sake, So you give up and resign yourselves, then, one of their pursuers said, The mark carved into his forehead protector was that of Sunagakure, You got some nerve, standing there drinking at a time like this, an enemy ninja remarked, Mukai says he’s got a weakness for alcohol and tobacco, It's how he get’s himself all psyched up before a fight, Their pursuers leapt at Mukai, Some shinobi turned toward Itachi and the rest of his team, With no other choice, Itachi braced himself, when his chunin teammates grabbed his shoulders and leapt up, Just don't get in the boss's way, the older chunin said, as they flew over the heads of their pursuers and escaped the circle, Mukai noticed that some pursuers were leaping up to follow them, Your fight's with me, He launched an incredibly fast kick that exploded in the stomach of an enemy flying up after Itachi and the others, Without so much as a cry, the man hit the ground and lost consciousness, Mukai dropped back down to earth, So, let's get started then, His chakra swelled up suddenly, His left pupil disappeared, and concentric circles radiated out from his eyelids, Byakugan, The kekkei genkai only passed down through the Hyuga clan, Shisui had said it was unthinkable that any Kohinata would have the Byakugan, given that their family had split off however many generations ago from the main Hyuga clan, But that impossible thing was happening at that moment, before his very eyes, Don't usually show this off, but today's special, Mukai said to their pursuers, and his eyes caught sight of Itachi for an instant, One person, one blow, Once Mukai had struck twenty or so times, only the enemy leader remained standing, then used Eight Trigrams Two Palms, Mukai placed his palm on the man's stomach, and launched two blows in succession, Eight Trigrams Four Palms, Four blows, The man opened his eyes wide in fear, Eight Trigrams Eight Palms, Eight blows, Blood shot out of the enemy's mouth, Eight Trigrams Sixteen Palms, Mukai's palms hit the enemy sixteen times, from his face to his legs, The man danced up lightly into the air like a dead leaf blown away by a strong wind, but there was already no light of consciousness in his eyes, it all happened in a blink of an eye, Mukai tucked his cigarette butt into his ashtray more than twenty Sunagakure shinobi sprawled out on the ground around him, As he walked leisurely toward Itachi, his left eye regained its light once more, It's what you call a throwback, he noted, The main family and the branch families might be separate in theory, but you can't separate the blood, If the element's in there, it'll show up on the surface like this, Don't run around telling people, He rested a hand on Itachi's head, and the boy shook his head to shake it off, Itachi and Shisui were going to kill this man by them selves which seems, it was shaping to be a difficult mission.

Fugaku says he has something to tell his Clan at the Shrine today, and tells them, Itachi’s Anbu entry is at hand, an Uchiha will join the Anbu, and is the most favourable opportunity they’ve ever had, taking advantage of Itachi’s entry into the Anbu, they will move towards a Coup d’état, the true objective of Itachi joining the Anbu is to investigate the particular of the situation in the village, and report back to them.

Note: Itachi Shinden Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 4 Section 1, Mukai would be taking the following day off, his 1st in a month, once Itachi learned of this, fact from Danzo, he hardened his resolve, the arrangements were made soon, and Itachi and Shisui who was to accompany him, had their duties schedules changed, through Danzo’s agency, Itachi was going to kill a ninja living in his own village the following day.

Note: Sasuke is training with Itachi and Itachi says he has an important mission tomorrow which he has to study and Sasuke says he's a liar and gets Hurt and Itachi carry's him and says he's going start getting assigned missions and that Sasuke will start Academy tomorrow, in Chapter 220, 402, Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 4 Section 1.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 4 Section 2, The three ninjas stood looking at each other, surrounded by more than ten Kirigakure ninja sprawled out on the ground, unconscious, They had all been defeated by Itachi and Shisui alone, Surrender quietly, Mukai Kohinata, Shisui said, from beside Itachi, The comma-shaped marks of the sharingan had already popped up in his eyes, The Hokage is lenient on those who turn themselves in, He probably won't kill him, and Mukai actives Byakugan, and they fight, Inside the domain of the Land of Fire, three or so hours to the north of Konohagakure, the three ninjas were fighting in a small basin surrounded by slightly elevated mountains, Not a single blade of grass grew on the rocky mountains, and there were any number of places for a lone person to hide, Itachi had slipped behind a convenient rock, and was watching over the other two as they fought, It had only been his Shadow Clone up against Mukai, Itachi hadn't moved from this place since the fight started, Just barely dodging Mukai's left thrust, Shisui threw his torso back, Given the perfect opportunity, Mukai pressed in on the younger man.

Shisui leapt backward, as if in flight, In that instant, Mukai's face was turned toward the rock Itachi was hiding behind, But their optical axes still had not intersected, Mukai turned his gaze toward Shisui as he landed, and then abruptly averted his eyes, The sharingan had been activated, Naturally, Shisui's sharingan had been a feint, The place toward which Mukai had turned his face was in the exact direction of the rock concealing Itachi, Itachi's gaze, his mind sharply focused on his enemy, and Mukai's gaze, unconsciously taking Itachi in, intersected, Or they should have, When they were a hair's breadth apart, Mukai kicked suddenly at the ground and flew upward, An incredible leap, When he landed, he kicked at another rock, and bounded into the sky again, Itachi's hiding spot had been found out, Mukai dodged Shisui’s kick and grabs Shisui’s neck lifting the sturdy body of the young man with one arm, being strangled like that Shisui struggled frantically, but the 5 fingers that snuck into his throat simply would not peel away, Itachi calls Mukai’s name and take a step forward, Mukai says do you want me to kill him, and Itachi keep moving towards Mukai which, he tightened his grip on Shisui’s throat and was going to crush Shisui’s Adam’s apple, Itachi shouted stop and activated Sharigan, Mukai says that won’t work on him, as he turned his face away from Itachi, before his eyes was Itachi’s friends face, the Mangekyo Sharigan/ MS, Shisui muttered, the eyes of Itachi’s friend now crimson took a shape unlike any other sharigan Itachi had ever seen, Most likely, the intersection of the gazes of Shisui and Mukai had lasted less than a thousandth of a second, For a normal sharingan, the user couldn't be certain of capturing his opponent in a moment that short, Shisui had not missed that fleeting instant, Mukai had definitely been ensnared in the genjutsu, Mukai, Shisui shouted, dumbfounded, the hand around his throat releasing him at last, Before his eyes, Mukai fell, a spray of blood shooting from his stomach, Mukai had cut his own stomach, The instant Shisui's sharingan had been activated, Mukai had stiffened slightly, and pulled a kunai from his pocket to slash a cross into his own belly, Hold on, Mukai, Shisui shouted, crouching down to cradle the ninja's head, he’s a spy for another village, Any interference with his brain, and a jutsu that makes him end his own life is executed, he can't save him, Mukai coughed, and blood spilled out of his mouth, he’s never seen anyone caught in a genjutsu in that short a time before, What the hell was that, Shisui didn’t answer, Itachi says to Mukai, Do you have anything you want to say, Mukai says so, this is where they’re at, he did what he did on his own, his wife and kid had nothing to do with it, So, he’s saying the crime of treason was his alone, Totally selfish, but, well, With a trembling hand, Mukai groped for something in his pocket, Itachi pushed aside Mukai’s fingers and pulled out an object he was fumbling for, he grabbed a charge from his package, and put it between Mukai’s lips, and Shisui pulled out the lighter from Mukai’s pocket and held the flame to the end of the cigarette Mukai took a long drag, letting smoke flow down the bottom of his lungs, before exhaling the smoke as though relating the taste, and says this is how a ninja dies you know, he will be waiting for him over there and his hand drops and his cigarette still between his fingers, he stopped moving, Shisui says it’s over, Shisui then asked Itachi could he keep quiet about his sharigan, the say the Mangekyo Shrigan, and showed it once again and says when the time comes I’ll tell you everything, just you, everything.

If Itachi’s an Anbu entry mission is same day as Itachi’s Ninja Academy Entry it means it’s April like when Japanese schools start, so Either Itachi was promoted to Anbu at 10 just before Turning 11, or he was promoted 2 months after when he turned 11.

Sasuke starts Academy when Itachi is 11 and gets his 1st Anbu assignment to see if he has what it takes to be accepted into the Anbu.

Sasuke starts Academy when Itachi is 11 and gets his 1st Anbu assignment to see if he has what it takes to be accepted into the Anbu.

If Itachi’s an Anbu entry mission is same day as Itachi’s Ninja Academy Entry it means it’s April like when Japanese schools start, so Either Itachi was promoted to Anbu at 10 just before Turning 11, or he was promoted 2 months after when he turned 11.

Note: Flashback of Sasuke Entering the Ninja Academy, in Chapter 221.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 4 Section 3, Itachi in Danzo’s room of the Foundation, talking about team Ro which Kakashi Hatake is Team Leader of, Danzo prepares a transfer celebration for Itachi and that the Anbu in the Tiger Mask in the Room with him will also be on loan to Team Ro, Although Danzo's Foundation was also a part of the Anbu, it had a different chain of command and leadership from the Anbu, which was under the direct control of the third Hokage, the two organizations were completely separate, Itachi had heard that because of this, they didn't regularly exchange information or personnel, Danzo says Don't worry, he naturally obtained Hiruzen's permission, the Anbu in the White Tiger Mask says to Itachi, Nice to meet him, his name is Surgaru, he had a serious illness in his throat when he was young, and he hasn’t been able to speak that well since, Danzo says to Itachi you can use this man as your hands and feet and Itachi says hands and feet, Surgaru says yes he’s a member of Danzo’s foundation, Danzo’s orders are absolute if he’s order to be his hands and feet he’s prepared to give his life for him, even if Itachi is younger than him, he noted with a deadpan look that’s implied sarcasm, Danzo says Surgaru is to be a loan to Team Ro and the Team leader Jakashi doesn’t know about this and he needn’t even be aware of him, but will always be keeping him safe, Itachi says Keeping me safe, Are you saying that someone is targeting me, Danzo says The first Uchiha Anbu, a mere eleven years old, That position's plenty to inspire prejudice and jealousy, Itachi joins Team Ro, after finishing his report to Danzo, Itachi and joined the Anbu without incident and was in a small park in the Clan compound in the evening and at the Entrance of the compound he ran into Izumi, on her way home from a mission, without either of them inviting the other, they naturally turned to the park, Izumi got on a swing while Itachi got on a bench, Izumi says sorry about that time, Itachi says that time, Izumi says at the tea shop, and she apologised about getting mad and flying out the tea shop, he hadn’t talked just the two of them since then, and all kind of this happened since then o Itachi had completely forgotten about it, and Itachi said he should apologise, he didn’t think it would bother her that much, Itachi asked how her mission was, she said no big deal compared with him, and that they just use her however and she’s handy and taking care of the Fire Daimyo’s wife’s pets, or help the Land of Fire admin to a new office and stuff, Itachi was relieved she wasn’t on any dangerous mission, and tried not to show it, Izumi says she heard he joined the Anbu, everyone in the compound knows, The village also wished that the ninjas who belonged to it would not make themselves known, to the extent that that was possible, and yet, Itachi's posting to the Anbu was already spreading throughout the compound, The idea that this showed the strength of the solidarity of the clan was a nice one, but was it really all right for so much information to be leaked, The clan were so quick to mention a coup-d'état, Izumi says she’s scared and feels Itachi going further and further away, and rest her head in his chest asking to stay there longer, Itachi waited for her to calm down, and she says we’re 11 years old, but Itachi, you’re already, where are you going Itachi, Itachi said am not going anywhere, and was about to say probably but swallowed that last word.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 4 Section 4, Itachi and the man in the Fox Mask Kakashi, Guarding the Hokage, Kakashi says because they are Anbu doesn’t means it’s all dangerous missions, Guarding the Hokage is a legitimate mission too, Itachi says he knows that, Kakashi was Anbu leader of Team Ro and Itachi’s direct supervisor, although he was still young, at 20 years old, and had already been a member of the village’s elite Anbu for 8 years, he was talented and the Hokage trusted him implicitly, Kakashi was a good supervisor, carefully considering the feelings of his young new subordinate,

Friend-killer, The phrase of choice for people looking to badmouth Kakashi. Itachi had heard it any number of times since he joined the Anbu, However, every time, it had been from someone older than Kakashi satisfied, with their subordinates, It was nothing more than an insult stemming from annoyance or jealousy, If it was to complete the mission, Team Leader Kakashi would even kill his friends, The faces of those uttering this ugly abuse were always mean.

But on a day-to-day basis, Itachi had never heard a single world against their comrades from Kakashi, In fact, it was actually notable how careful he was to pay his respect to the bonds he shared with them, At that very moment, Kakashi was being extra attentive to Itachi, who had only just joined the Anbu, he was intently searching for a way to start a conversation, Kakashi asked Itachi if he remembers the basic tactic of the Anbu, Itachi says he has the basics in his head, Kakashi says no surprise there, there clearly a reason why they called him a prodigy when he came to the Academy, Itachi says I don’t know if the Youngest Graduate can really say anything here, Kakashi says when he graduated it was in the middle of the Great War, and they needed ninjas, the situations different now, now that Kakashi mentioned it the current system at the academy was different from how it had been when Itachi graduated, the Great War and its after effects still lingered when he Graduated, because of that, once his actual abilities were recognised, he was skipped ahead, leading to his early graduation, but now is a time of peace, the Hokage was determined that ninjas must be carefully cultivated over a number of years an it was no longer possible to graduate in short time, as it had been, in the past, thus no matter how talent Sasuke was, he couldn’t become a ninja, until he was 11 years old, Kakashi says he’ll be fine and hopes that the Anbu will be a place of pride for him.

Itachi at the main building of the Shrine now that Izumi was Genin she will be attending the Meetings too, since she was the same age he was, Fugaku says it has been officially decided that his Son Itachi will join the Anbu, he has already began to carry out missions as a member, and now they have a pipeline connecting there Clan with the centre of the village, no longer will they simply receive from the village, they will also actively investigate, themselves, Fugaku asks Itachi has he noticed anything joining the Anbu, Itachi says it is a fact that the people of the village are wary of the Uchiha clan, and do not think well of them, but that said, he doesn’t feel any active hatred, no persecution of the clan, At best, he believe’s their feelings are the sort of worries and jealousies that anyone has, Fugaku says This worry and jealousy you mention can come together, and be twisted into a bigger emotion, and Itachi says If you add on backward predictions like that, anything can be reduced to a negative phenomenon, Fugaku says hey Itachi, You're really siding with the village here, aren't you, Whose ally are you anyway, the village's, or the clan's, Maybe your judgment's a bit dull after joining the Anbu, getting a little full of yourself, Itachi says It's better not to force things into a framework with words, Yashiro says what, enemy, ally, If you differentiate between things with the tool of words, you lose sight of the true situation, You're forced to step into places you shouldn't, he doesn’t have time for this incomprehensible back and forth, Whose ally is he, Itachi Uchiha, Itachi says it’s obvious isn’t it he’s a member of the Uchiha clan, after meeting Shisui asks to talk to Itachi for a minute and says he understands how he feels, and tells him Yashiro’s the leader of the group and pushing for a coup, to that man all the people of the village are enemies, Shisui says since it looked like he was going into the Anbu, he did some manoeuvring himself and takes directly to the Hokage and obtained the authority to independently investigate the true state of the affairs in the Clan, and that he’s been taken off his regular duties o make sure the Clan doesn’t get any more, riled up their dissatisfaction is going to explode, The Hokage promised that he could act at his own discretion to prevent that, and gave me a position in the Anbu, But that's just in name only, In the end, he reports directly to the Hokage, so Itachi’s dad and the others don't know about him joining the Anbu, Even inside, only a few people know, and hasn’t said anything about the coup, they’re gonna keep fighting to stop the clan from exploding, Itachi from inside the Anbu, and him as a ninja, reporting directly to the Lord Hokage, No matter what happens, he’ll never forget his promise with him, Shisui thrust a fist out, Itachi stuck his own out to touch it, Above all else, they have make them stop with the coup at least, Shisui says firmly and Itachi nodded in agreement.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 4 Section 5, Itachi didn’t want to believe what he saw before his eyes, in a windowless room, in the basement of the building given to the Anbu, monitors were crowded together, their screens full of sights familiar to Itachi, the 9 Tails incident, The village officials suspected Uchiha involvement, Kakashi remarked, standing beside him, Itachi listened, staring at the monitors, Not satisfied with just isolating the Clan compound on the edge of the village, they started monitoring everything in the compound, 24/7, There was no way he could tell the Clan, If they found out that every corner of the compound was being monitored 24 hours a day, the rage his father and the others felt would become even more intense, It would simply add ample fuel to the fire for those who were clamoring for a coup, Itachi had been sent to the Anbu by his father as a spy to investigate the true, state of affairs in the village, If he were to faithfully fulfill that role, he should report this fact to the clan immediately, The moment he abandoned the idea of telling them, he abandoned the idea that he was a clan spy, from now on he’s going to be monitoring his Clan there all day, Itachi says you’re telling me to watch my Clan comrades, Kou the man in the Monkey mask says Whether they're his Clan comrades or not, a mission is a mission, his Clan drew in 9 Tails, So they're being monitored, Accept reality, newbie, Kou’s colleague in the Cat mask says Kou’s sister was killed in 9 tails attack so he doesn’t have the best impression of the Uchiha Clan, Kakashi says don’t involve your personal feelings in a mission, and Itachi and Sugaru took over monitoring the monitor and Kou and the Cat mask Anbu left, it had been just over 4 hrs since Kakashi left and time Itachi and Sugaru haven’t said a word, At one of these momentary fragments, he felt the faintest sense that something was off, and he stopped his hand, The composition he expected, from the gates of Naka Shrine, The stone paving of the path stretched straight out from the stone gates to the main building of the shrine, But the space precisely in the middle, between the gates and the main building, looked slightly twisted to Itachi's eyes, Just for a fraction of a second, The scene in the monitor had already regained its stillness, It had been a faint disturbance that Sugaru most likely hadn't noticed, If anyone else had seen it, they would no doubt have thought it was simply the wind shaking the camera, But Itachi had seen that disturbance before, The scene near the center of the stone paving had been disturbed by a vortex centered on one point, Almost like the surrounding space was being sucked into that point.

The man in the mask, The phenomenon shown on the monitor was exactly the same as the jutsu the man in the mask had used when he escaped after he attacked Itachi and his team, during the mission to guard the daimyo of the Land of Fire, Why would that man, Itachi muttered carelessly, before he noticed Sugaru's presence, and regretted it, But Sugaru's attention was focused on the monitor before him, and Itachi was sure the masked man’s right eye was a sharigan, which means he’s an Uchiha, Over 3 years had passed since that incident, From time to time, the scene of his teammate's death would come back to life in his mind, Tenma lost his life, an almost unsightly terror plastered on his face, looking as though he had no idea what was actually happening, Itachi had been astonished at the overwhelming difference in power that existed between himself and the man in the mask, He had despaired at his own powerlessness, and ended up activating his own sharingan, All of which meant that the man in the mask was the man who had awakened Itachi as a true Uchiha ninja, The murderer of his colleague, and yet, a person he was indebted to, He felt a strange connection with the man in the mask, Over the last 3 years, Itachi had wondered any number of times about the man's true identity, and Itachi think of who it could be, he narrowed it down to The first possibility was that a member of the Uchiha clan thought to have died in the Great War had survived, and become the man in the mask, It was a general rule that if a member of the Uchiha clan died in battle, their sharingan would be brought, home by another ninja. So, the man couldn't have stolen it from a corpse, In which case, it made sense to assume that someone thought to have died was alive, and coming to the compound with his sharingan still in his possession, The second possibility was that the man in the mask was someone who had broken away from the Uchiha clan, This was less likely than the first option, Because since the founding of Konoha, only one person had ever broken away from the clan and left the village, Uchiha Madara, The man who founded Konohagakure together with Hashirama of the Senju clan. He had left the village, and was said to have died in battle with Hashirama in a place called the Valley of the End, It wasn't possible for someone who had died to be alive, At this point, Itachi should have abandoned this second option, But for some reason, he couldn't completely put it aside, He had felt the man's overwhelming chakra, his powerful presence, for himself, and it had been stronger than that of any ninja Itachi had encountered up to that point, If a ninja like that had died in battle, then it should have gone down in history, However, nowhere in the records of the great battles of the past was the death of such a capable Uchiha ninja verified, In which case, Itachi could consider the idea that Madara was alive, Sugaru tells Itachi its time to switch shifts.

Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 4 Section 6, about 2 months have passed since Itachi has joined the Anbu, but his monotonous days continued unchanged, His main duties were guarding the Hokage's office and practicing with his comrades, he still hadn't been given any missions that would expose his life to danger, he couldn't exactly say the village was at peace if they were out on assassinations and dangerous missions all the time, The fact that they’ve got nothing to do is proof of peace, Kakashi had said, and laughed easily, and yet Itachi wondered If the village was supposed to be at peace, then why was his heart in such turmoil, Why did he feel like things were so urgent, Because of his clan, In the shadow of the tranquility of the village, the Uchiha brethren were seeking chaos, This was the main cause of the disquiet in Itachi's heart,

Whatever happened, he had to at least prevent a coup, But he couldn't come up with a concrete plan to do that, He had said he would move with Shisui, but the two of them could stand side by side with their arms spread out, and they still wouldn't be able to completely hold back the clan's eagerness for destruction, The fact that he couldn't find a way to break this deadlock had Itachi panicked.

Itachi on his way home from work, the little park ahead of him. It was already late in the day, evening. The sun had long ago slid off to the west, and a gloom was descending on the area.

A boy, likely the one who laughed, was standing on a swing, staring out at three human shadows running off, Probably his friends, the boy on the swing shouted, you guys don't have a chance against the great Naruto Uzumaki here, There was no one in the village who did not know Naruto Uzumaki, The boy before him had been involved in the 9 Tails incident that had terrified the people of the village, The child with the 9 Tails inside him, When he walked along the road, everyone lowered their voices, There was only one person who did not know that the 9 Tails lived within his body, That was Naruto himself, He was unaware of the calamity in the village, it was sealed up in his body, and he lived with people in fear of him, Naruto couldn't understand why people persecuted him, and both of his parents were already gone from this world, He had no one to shower him with unconditional love, Itachi turned his feet toward the park, He advanced quietly toward the swing with the boy, moving weakly back and forth, He sat down beside Naruto, whose face was turned to the ground, Naruto nearly fell off his swing when he noticed Itachi in surprise, Naruto says who are you, Itachi says who he is doesn’t matter, Naruto says his mother told him not to talk to strangers, Itachi says she’s gone though, and Naruto smiled with his right arm up to the back of his head saying so you know that, is he that famous, Itachi said in a sense, and says his friends ran off, Naruto says they don’t get his pranks and aren’t his pals and it was like he was trying desperately to act cheerful so that his loneliness wouldn't be seen, Everyone knew Naruto's true self, For the village, the Nine Tails incident had left a scar deeper than any other, Suspected of having controlled the Nine Tails, the Uchiha clan was also still trapped under that cloud, Itachi himself had been slandered more times than he could remember because of it, There was probably not a single person in the village willing to have any meaningful contact with the boy who housed the source of that trauma in his body, In other words, Naruto was the greatest victim of the 9 Tails incident, Itachi didn't know how the Nine Tails came to be sealed in the boy's body, But he thought that anyone who would seal the embodiment of disaster in a baby was not in their right mind, Perhaps they hadn't considered how the child would be persecuted, The details of the Nine Tails incident were a closely guarded secret in the village, The truth was hidden in darkness, and only Naruto was left, Naruto was one part of the darkness of the village, The village had been built sacrificing people like Naruto, The village officials had sealed the disaster in Naruto, and directed the dissatisfaction of the people somewhere else with their persecution of the Uchiha clan, in order to skillfully keep the village running, Itachi said It's probably time for you to be getting home, Naruto says he can go home, but it's not like there's anyone there, Naruto's mouth twisting downward, he put on a show of being tough, Itachi says then I’ll go home, Naruto says what and cried in exaggerated surprise when Itachi stood up, Itachi said keep fighting, But Naruto seemed happy, and chuckled to himself as he rubbed his nose with a finger, and then he leapt forcefully off the swing, stood tall, and pointed his index finger at Itachi, My name's Naruto Uzumaki, he’s gonna be Hokage someday, Itachi felt a flame blaze in his heart even if he carried the burden of the village’s darkness, his boy wasn’t giving up on his own destiny, not resenting the village, not hating people, he believed in his own dream, honestly and wholeheartedly, Itachi says he hope he is, Naruto says he’s totally going to be Hokage, Remember him 'til then.

Danzo called in Itachi next to him was Sugaru, how’s the Anbu he asks, Itachi says he doesn’t know, Danzo says honest answer, he’ll no doubt have any number of experiences from now on that he could only have in the Anbu, Until then, polish his skills, Danzo said, almost as if he were Itachi's boss, But Itachi was in the Anbu, which was under the direct control of the Hokage, with no connection with the Foundation, In terms of work, Danzo and Itachi basically had nothing to do with one another, Danzo says he called him their today for a reason, he’s heard that the Uchiha clan compound has been particularly strict with outsiders lately, it was true that in the last few months, the compound had taken on an air of exclusivity, It seemed that his father giving voice to the word coup had given the compound itself a will, they are also going to the regular meetings, Danzo asked, point-blank, The Uchiha clan was monitored 24 hours a day by the Anbu, It was only natural that Danzo would be aware of the meetings, Yes, Itachi answered honestly, preparing himself for the worst, knowing that there was no point in hiding anything, Danzo nodded deeply, seemingly satisfied, he’ll be frank, he wants him to report the details of those meetings to me, His voice slammed into Itachi, containing indescribable pressure, If things continue as they are, the Uchiha clan will fall, his power is needed to stop that from happening, Are you telling me to betray my clan, Itachi says,

He’s not betraying them, he’s saving them, Danzo says, Betrayal is an act that brings about a disadvantage to the betrayed, The act of reporting the details of the meetings to me is to prevent the explosion of your clan, and as such, it is advantageous to them, Thus, it cannot be said to be betrayal, Danzo likely intended to complicate his thinking and blind him, but Itachi was not fooled, No matter what the result was for his clan, telling Danzo what happened at the meetings was nothing other than betrayal,

Danzo had misread him, Itachi was not fixated on the word betrayal, Itachi said he understands, They had been able to gain the cooperation of the third Hokage, thanks to Shisui and Itachi's decision here might turn into an opportunity to use Danzo's power, He would prevent his clan's implosion by connecting it with the center of the village, he doesn’t want to do anything to rob his Clan of dignity, he leaves the selection of information he brings to him to Itachi, he’s counting on him, The fate of his Clan rests on his decisions, Danzo's voice weighed heavily on Itachi.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 5 Section 1, The dead The dead bodies of his comrades lay in the valley ahead, Land of Frost ninjas had killed them, The two Lands had been on the verge of forming an alliance when it happened, The alliance was to be made official 10 days later, and they had been in the middle of a mission to exchange letters stating the final terms, when the ninjas from the Land of Frost suddenly bared their teeth, The enemy had been uninterested in an alliance from the start, 4 Konoha ninjas up against 10 from the Land of Frost, Outnumbered, In the blink of an eye, the Konoha ninjas tasked with the duty of receiving the letter had been killed, If they witnessed the breakdown of negotiations, they were to exterminate the enemy, that was the mission Itachi and his team had been given, In other words, they were not to move until the situation was clear, Thus, their initial response had been delayed, leading to the annihilation of their allies, The moment ten Land of Frost ninjas appeared, a suspiciously large force it had felt very much like a breakdown in the process, If the Anbu had leapt out at that point in time, their comrades might not have died, However, even if Itachi had been leading the team, he couldn't have moved until all 4 were wiped out, Ahead of him, Kakashi landed in the midst of the enemy, his right hand already piercing one of the ninjas, A stream of blue lightning enveloped his arm, Chidori, Kakashi's best technique, by the time his team leader was pulling his arm back out, Itachi had landed dead center among the enemy, There were two other Anbu with them, One was Sugaru, and the other was a ninja called Tenzo, He was a little younger than Kakashi, but his career in the Anbu had already been fairly long, Konoha Anbu, an enemy ninja shouted, In the next instant, a thick tree branch tangled up around the man's throat and tightened, like a snake, Unable to push back against the incredible force of it, the man expired, long tongue lolling from his mouth, It was Tenzo's jutsu, He was able to use Wood Style, a ninjutsu only the first Hokage, Hashirama, had been able to use, Konoha never had any intention of making an alliance with us, hm, another enemy said to Kakashi, You came at us first, Kakashi didn't wait for the other man to argue the fact, Chidori dug into the other ninja's stomach, Itachi heard a shriek from behind him, Looking over his shoulder, he saw an enemy hurtling toward him, a long sword held up above his head, Itachi turned around, The sword closed in on the top of his head, He quickly lifted his arm, and grabbed the wrist of the enemy's hand on the hilt, Give it up, Itachi advised, still clutching the man's wrist, Unable to bring the sword down on Itachi, the enemy glared at him, cold sweat popping up on his forehead, The sharingan, His enemy shuddered violently once, and then completely relaxed, Like a marionette with its strings cut, the man had started to droop and fall toward the ground, when his head rolled off into space before Itachi's eyes, A ninja blade glittered to the rear of the enemy.

Sugaru, The Mission from the Lord Hokage Is the Extermination of the Enemy, Sugaru murmured to Itachi, There was no need to exterminate the enemy. Whether their envoys returned or not, the incident here would soon be known to the Land of Frost, it was vengeance enough to take out the ones who had murdered the four Konoha ninjas, Letting the others live, and return home to relate the true power of Konoha, would be a more effective check against the Land of Frost, There were 4 enemy ninjas left, They had already lost the will to fight, Sugaru's blade flew toward the neck of one on his knees, begging for his life, Beyond him, Tenzo's Wood Style ninjutsu produced sharp branches that pierced the back of a female ninja trying to flee, This will make the Land of Frost and Konoha enemies, Your lives will prevent that, Kakashi said gently, as his arm ripped into the other man's solar plexus, Itachi caught sight of an enemy coming toward him with a grim look, prepared for death, Holding kunai in both hands, clenching his teeth as he raced toward Itachi, the boy was still not even 10 years old, The Land of Frost was small, Although the larger battles were no more, in a country that still had few ninjas and a national power that was immature, even a child like this had plenty of war potential, His battle cry already sounded like a sob, Itachi met the boy head-on, A sharp pain raced through his stomach, The boy's kunai had stabbed him, The slender shoulders shook fiercely as they touched Itachi's belly, The boy's terror had surpassed his limits, and tears began to fill his eyes, Itachi, Kakashi shouted, he’s all right, he replied calmly, and Kakashi and the others watched, surrounding him from a distance, Shaking like a leaf, the boy slowly lifted his face, Tears spilled out of the eyes that looked up at Itachi, His fear became sound, and slipped out of him, You're a proper ninja now, Be strong, Itachi told his enemy kindly, In his confusion and fear, the boy had no idea what was going on. He shook his head from side to side, and desperately tried to turn his eyes away from reality, You didn't run away, you came right at me, So, I want to treat you with the courtesy a full-fledged ninja deserves." Itachi grabbed his kunai from behind, so that the boy couldn't see. He ran his blade up from below into the slender nape of his crying enemy's neck, He gently pulled the kunai from his own stomach, and stepped back, A spray of blood shot out from the boy's neck, None of it splattered Itachi.

This, too, was etiquette for a ninja, The young body fell onto the pile of corpses, neither enemy nor ally, This is also a battlefield, Itachi murmured, not loud enough for anyone else to hear, just a ninja, If this is how it is, I want to just walk away from the village, the clan, the Anbu, and be free, He knew that this would never be allowed, The boy's eyes, devoid of light, stared endlessly at the troubled Itachi.

Make a list of the number of expected participants at the time of action, invasion routes, attack targets, and assassination targets, He’d like to decide on the crucial day of action at the next meeting, Put together your opinions before then, If they have any ideas, they can speak them at any time, Simply make sure to be careful of the eyes of the people of the village, When Fugaku finished speaking, the brethren relaxed for a moment, They were loosening up at the thought of the end of the meeting, But that easy calm was shattered by the tense voice of Yashiro, saying is Itachi here, Itachi felt a disgust at the voice calling his name, When he didn't answer, the voice called his name again in irritation, Itachi says am here and raises his heavy arm, Yashiro simply stared at him with cold eyes, Itachi was there at the breakdown of negotiations with the Land of Frost the other day, yes, and says answer him, Itachi says Anbu missions are not to be spoken of to outsiders, Yashiro says is he seriously saying that to him, For what purpose did you join the Anbu, To obtain a variety of information from a place close to the center of the village, and report to us, Yashiro says, Fugaku says Yashiro, Yashiro says What has he brought to them since joining the Anbu, Not once have they heard the secrets of the village from his mouth, Itachi says he just doesn’t know any, so he can't talk about them, Yashiro says is it really only that, next to Yashiro Inabi another of Fugaku’s trusted confidante says he’s turning against them aren’t, Fugaku says enough, You both understand exactly what this time means for the clan, We cannot follow through on these serious matters when we are at each other's throats, At any rate, the next meeting will decide our path, It will be an important meeting, Be aware that absences will not be tolerated.

Note: Flashbacks of Gaara's father Rasa trying to kill him at 6 in Chapter 97, 129-131, 547-548.

Year 55:

(Land of Fire)

Garuda,

(Land of Medicines)

Kina Kodan,

Note: Garuda said to be 10 in 4th Databook character detail list in chapter 477 when sasuke is fighting Danzo, he's sasuke's partner.

Note: Kina said to be an Infant during the Roen attack 10 years ago which got sealed in him by his father Tenma, stated in Sasuke Jinraiden Chapter 2 and 4.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 5 Section 2, Danzo and Hiruzen talk alone in the Hokage office it’s been 6 months since Itachi has been in the Anbu and has carried out his duties faithfully and Danzo says it seems you have an Uchiha directly under you now, Hiruzen and has heard he removed Shisui Uchiha from his regular duties and given him permission to move at his own discretion and judgment and that in name at least we have another Uchiha in the Anbu, Hiruzen says Shisui wanted him to give him the freedom to act, he simply opened the road to him, Danzo said so now the Hokage is listening to the Whims of a mere ninja, Hiruzen says he simply took into consideration the feeling of someone worried about the Uchiha Clan, Dazno says Just as you have one of the Uchiha clan under your control, he should like one arranged for him, Hiruzen says You're saying give Itachi to the Foundation, Hiruzen says what are you thinking Danzo says why not promote him to Anbu Leader, Hiruzen says he’s only 11 and Anbu team leaders are to be 13 or older, Danzo says You do have that rule there somewhere, Hiruzen says The team leaders who rule over them must have sufficient judgment, Thus, the requirement that they be at least 13, Danzo says Sufficient judgment, Itachi already has that, Age and the like are meaningless before actual ability, are rules important Hiruzen, The dissatisfaction of the Uchiha clan is already a nearly untenable situation, In order to break through this status quo, we need someone in a position to make effective use of the will of the Foundation, and someone connected with you, A mere Anbu ninja won't be able to avoid the orders of his team leader, Promoting Itachi makes it easier for him to move, Hiruzen says You're saying put him between Danzo and him, without having Itachi belong to the Foundation, Danzo says That's exactly what he’s saying. No one in the Uchiha clan can match the abilities of Itachi and Shisui, If they can win those two over, it likely won't be difficult to prevent the explosion of their Clan, Just as he gave Shisui special privileges, it is necessary to give a certain amount of the same to Itachi, Hiruzen says But 11 is simply too young to lead a team, Danzo says Then, what if he were 12, Itachi's publicly disclosed age goes up a year, and that neatly takes care of the rule, don't you think, Hiruzen says let him think about it a little more, Danzo said understood he was certain Hiruzen would definitely consent.

Itachi asks Sasuke how’s school, Sasuke said it’s way better to train here like this with him, back when he had 1st started at the Academy, Itachi said the same sort of thing to Shisui, once again he felt keenly how alike him and his brother were alike, his mission finished early, so he decided to train with Sasuke, once he got home, because Itachi couldn’t spend much time with him normally, he actively tried to create opportunities, And the time he spent with Sasuke soothed Itachi more than anything else in his life. Sweating together with his little brother, he could escape his everyday troubles, Lately, whenever he saw Shisui, all they did was talk about where the clan was headed, It had been who knew how many years since they trained together, Even talking with Izumi, his attention ended up focused on her feelings, and he couldn't stay free of obstructive thoughts, He knew he was too involved there, but he couldn't help it, In the end, it was only when he was training with his brother that he could just be himself, without thinking about anything, Itachi asked Sasuke school boring and is it that his skills and thinking are too different, so things are going to well his friends, because it was like that for Itachi he was able to do everything better than everyone else, so the other students in his class seemed much like children, and there way of thinking and the way they faced things seemed to juvenile, and wouldn’t talk to them with the same sense of values, he wondered if it wasn’t the same for Sasuke, he felt his brother shared his same awkwardness he did when it came to interacting with people, Sasuke says he don't especially want it to go well or anything, he means, those guys, their ninjutsu and their schoolwork are just totally no good, Itachi says what about Naruto, a boy the same age as Sasuke with golden hair, Sasuke says He's a total disaster, no matter what they make them do, and he's always finding a reason to bug him, He's super annoying, he doesn’t think about him at all, but then he'll come over to him, and start complaining and stuff, if his little brother's position at school was no different from Itachi's when he had been there, then Itachi assumed the other students gave Sasuke a wide berth, While they acknowledged his abilities, none of them truly tried to befriend him, However, Naruto walked right up to Sasuke, The boy boasting he would be Hokage came back to life in Itachi's mind, That poor child with the 9 Tails in his body, no one wanted anything to do with him, Despite this, he had unshakeable faith in his big dreams, His bearing, his way of talking, everything about him was the polar opposite of Sasuke, But when Itachi imagined the 2 of them together, it seemed strangely fitting, He comes over to you because he's curious about you, Be nice to him, Itachi says, Sasuke Says He can't be nice to a kid like that, Itachi says It'd be nice if you could someday, placing the palm of his hand on Sasuke's head, Sasuke says There's totally no way, Sasuke shut his eyes tightly, his nose crinkling up, and gritted his teeth,

Unconsciously, Itachi burst out laughing at the funny expression, His little brother relaxed his face, and also started to laugh, The warm evening passed peacefully.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Chapter 5 Section 3, Fugaku says he heard you went to the park with Sasuke, Itachi said he did, He had seen the 2 come home covered in sweat, and called Itachi in after his bath, His younger son was sitting at the table, and talking with his mother, he has to prepare for his mission tomorrow. He’d appreciate it if he could be brief about his business, Itachi said, "Don't speak so stiffly," Fugaku said, and smiled. It was the best smile he could muster. In general, he rarely smiled. As the head of the Military Police Force, as the man who pulled together all the young people of the clan, he felt that he must not show reckless emotion, and then asks how’s Itachi’s work with the Anbu still smiling, Itachi says As long as he’s putting into practice the things he’s learned since graduating from the academy, there is no how, Fugaku says Yashiro and Inabi trying hard to keep his tone gentle, he’s his father, and he is his son, Those are the only people in this room, Itachi says Things haven't changed, really, from when he wasn't in the Anbu, Fugaku says you’re not doing any difficult work, Itachi says There is some of that, Given that he’s in the Anbu, no weakness can be tolerated, Fugaku says that’s my boy, Don't worry about things at the meeting, and It's not as though everyone in the clan thinks the same way, he has no intention of forcing their way of thinking on him, Rather than a stone drifting along with the strong current, he wants him to be a man, like a rock that stands against the current, and pierces it, You do not need to yield in your own thinking, If you cannot accept what Yashiro and the others say, then you can stand up, and proudly assert your own ideas, Itachi asks his father if he has different feelings from Yashiro and Inabi, Fugaku say he does not, and they are the same as theirs, and says "You should stay true to your thinking. Fight, be confused, be lost, and come through that to find your answer, and once he finds it, make his decision, and do not waver from it, Find his answer, and be ready to follow through. That is determination.

The formal meeting room at the Hokage residence the seat where budgetary policy for the governance of the village of Konohagakure was determined, In addition to Hiruzen and Danzo, the councilors Koharu and Homura were there, At this meeting, they would set the basic policy, and, taking that into consideration, Hiruzen would select the personnel in village government and the official budgets, About the budget for the Military Police Force, Hiruzen looked at the other 3, In his hand was their proposal, The basic idea is to significantly reduce the budget, but what exactly is the meaning of this, Koharu, Koharu says It's been 7 years since the end of the war, Life has gotten back to normal, for the most part, and it has become customary for the Anbu to investigate serious and brutal crimes, The current role of the Military Police Force is quite limited, There's no need for the same budget they've had in the past, is there, Hiruzen say That said, isn't cutting their budget by 40% a bit too abrupt, A cut like this will also have a significant effect on Military Police Force personnel, Homura says Rebuilding after the 9 Tails' attack is mostly complete, The urgent need now is for new facilities and wider roads, and now that early graduation has been abolished, the academy will need to expand soon, as well, they don't have the extra resources for a shrinking organisation, Hiruzen says knows that, but if they do this in such a way that we make the Military Police Force alone the enemy, it will be increasingly, Danzo says then, is there another division in this village that is growing smaller as obviously as the Military Police Force, The cause for the reduction is clear, peace in the village, and the expansion of Anbu duties, The Military Police Force can perform no other role than maintaining the peace, and given the negative feelings of dissatisfaction they harbor toward the village, it's doubtful as to whether or not they are faithfully performing even that role, he feels that maintaining their current budget is simply pampering them, Hiruzen says it’s not pampering it’s sheltering, Danzo says Why would people with no impediment to their work need to be sheltered, Hiruzen says Because the places where they can be active have been severely limited by people like you, who are prejudiced against that Clan, Danzo says So, you would shelter them because there is prejudice, Isn't that in and of itself an act of distancing and discrimination, It's precisely because they have the Military Police Force to work at, and because they are assured a more than ample budget from the village, that the Uchiha clan refuse contact with outsiders, and sneak around with people from their own circle, You distance them in the framework of the Military Police Force under the pretext of sheltering them, and so you allow them to grow this evil flower of dissatisfaction within themselves, Isn't that so, Hiruzen says The formation and management of the Military Police Force was the dying wish of the second Hokage, Danzo says don’t you feel that’s outdated way of thinking, Danzo, Koharu and Hours all agreed and the 3 had the same opinion of the matter of reducing the Military Police Force Budget, only Hiruzen disagreed and Hiruzen says what will we do when the Uchiha clan's dissatisfaction explodes, Danzo says he’s using Shisui to prevent that is he not, and that the reason you pulled the young ninja, so worried about his clan, from his regular missions, gave him a position in name only, and permitted him a certain level of independence, Hiruzen says 30% then, and was acting as how Danzo expected, Danzo didn’t believe a reduction of 40% was possible either, he anticipated 30% being the point of comparison.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Chapter 5 Section 4, Shisui called Itachi to their usual cliff, it was the middle of the night, the village and the compound were asleep, still the true of the Anbu still watching, over the compound, during Itachi’s time working monitoring the Clan he memorised the angels of the cameras watching them, and had already devised a route that allowed him be freely through the compound, slipping through gaps that rose up in the angles between cameras, he only told Shisui about the Anbu’s monitoring, and the route through their blind spots, he was the only ninja he could trust, no one knew their meeting, Itachi says he knows he said they’d work together, Sorry for always leaving things to him, Shisui says he can't do anything that would cause you to neglect your missions, they’re both in the Anbu, but he’s got permission from the Lord Hokage to move freely, It's only natural he’s be working, There's nothing for him to feel bad about, Shisui had gotten the right to act alone to dig into the clan's conspiracy, and was investigating their movements day and night, Unlike him, Itachi was always putting the clan off, swamped with his daily missions, Shisui says Before I get into it, there's something he wants to tell him, The Clan suspects him, and says a ninja of the Clan has been ordered to monitor him and the one that accepting this role was a ninja of the same Clan, his father and the one who has been given the task of watching him was Shisui himself, had ordered him to watch him, they’re using the fact he’s close with him, 3 senior officials from the Military Police Force came to order him to monitor him, Yashiro, Inabi and Tekka suspect him, and Yashiro has some fierce words at the meetings and it wasn’t his father, But his father was in the position to give orders to those 3, Even if Yashiro and the others were the ones who approached Shisui, Itachi didn't know exactly where that order had originated, Shisui says he’ll make some things up, and report back to them, Shisui says know what day tomorrow is, right, Itachi nodded, Last time, his father had said that this meeting would be critical, they would decide the schedule for the coup, In other words, at the meeting the following day, the consensus of opinion of the clan would be confirmed, and the resolve to act would become fixed, If everything goes as usual at the meeting tomorrow, we won't be able to stop things, Shisui says tomorrow he’s going to attack Itachi’s father Fugaku on his way to Naka Shrine, he’s not going to kill Lord Fugaku or anything, he’s just going to trap him in a genjutsu, like the Sharigan he used on Mukai, the Mangekyo Sharigan, After that day, Itachi had looked into this himself, In old Uchiha documents, only the existence of the Mangekyo sharingan was noted, the record stopped with the mention that its power far surpassed that of the normal sharingan, It further noted that the number of people who had activated this sharingan could be counted on both hands, perhaps, and that even for members of the clan, it was a visual jutsu with many unknowns, Shisui says when he awakened these eyes he awakened these eyes, he got a certain jutsu.

A jutsu called Kotoamatsukami, It puts the person trapped in the genjutsu into a state of total unawareness, then, you can make them do what you want, The advantage of this technique is that the effect and the duration are both multiplied because of the power of the Mangekyo sharingan, and he just has to look at his target's eyes, and he can pour his chakra in, even if they’re gazes aren't intersecting, and the amount of chakra is several times more than with normal sharingan, So the target falls into the visual jutsu instantly, They have no idea anything's even happened, Itachi says So you mean by the time the enemy sees you, they're already in the jutsu, Shisui says exactly, he can just get him in Kotoamatsukami, he can make Lord Fugaku tell everyone the coup is off, and he can make Fugaku himself believe from the bottom of his heart that it was his own idea, and the one who could execute this plan was Shisui, Shisui tells Itachi not to come to meeting tomorrow, the radical faction suspect him, If he makes Fugaku’s attitude change abruptly, they will point fingers at him and he doesn’t know what they will do if he’s at the meeting, and tells Itachi to wait here until the meetings over, and he’ll come to report the results of the meeting, just wait till then, next time they meet the Clan will have taken a step towards peace.

Note: Chapter 221, Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 5 Section 5, at night, Itachi tells his mother and Father he won’t be going to tomorrow’s meeting and Sasuke wakes up and is told by Itachi to go back to sleep and is told the same by his father Fugaku.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 5 Section 6, the Day of the meeting, Shisui encounters Danzo and is poisoned by Sugaru a Anbu member with a White tiger mask from the Aburame Clan, and Danzo plucked out Shisui’s right eye, Danzo says he finally has the Mangekyo Sharigan, Shisui then disappeared, Danzo told Sugaru and his other subordinates to go after him, Itachi was at the cliff saying the meeting will end in 2 hours and had time to think what they were going to do from then on, Itachi sensed Shisui behind him, Shisui said sorry, Shisui says he couldn’t even make contact with Fugaku, the meeting is probably right now, and they probably decided the key parts of the coup meeting today, our plan failed, Shisui says one of Danzo’s subordinates uses insect he wears a white tiger mask and he died him with poison, Sugaru he was an Aburame, and it doesn’t look like there’s any way to stop the Uchiha coup now, if they start fighting Konoha other counties will attack, just when he was about to stop it with his MS and tells Itachi Danzo stole his right eye, and doesn’t trust him, he will protect the village in his own way regardless of how it looks, he would’ve gotten his left eye too, before he does he’s giving it to him, entrusting it to Itachi he was giving him permission to use the power lodged in it, and tells Itachi he’s his best friend, he’s the only one he can ask to protect this village, the Uchiha name protect them, Shisui kneaded his chakra, a single crow and and eye rest in his palm floated up covering the birds left eye, and merged with it, he could no longer see, he entrusted his eye to his friend, he says there’s one thing more he wants to give him, Shisui says he killed his good friend with his hand, it was a little before he met Itachi, he met a boy at the Academy he could call a friend, he fought alone side him, after he became Genin too, on the same team, back then he was his best friend, they trusted each other but that didn’t even last a year, This was right after the war ended, Missions were way harsher than they are now, they were in the middle of a mission with a few other teams to clean up after the war, and they ended up by ourselves in another Land, they’re luck was bad, they ran into more enemies than they could handle, they were staring right at death, this tale was from before Itachi became a ninja, Fortunately, some of the comrades they got separated from found them, They saved him, but his friend was slow to run, If he had just reached out to him, he wouldn't have had to die, The difference between life and death was determined by a slight difference in luck, and that bit of luck had divided the 2 boys, It definitely hadn't been his fault, But Shisui regretted his friend's death as if it were a crime he had committed, Shisui says he envied that friend, He was blessed with more talent than him, he was jealous of him, always running out in front of him, So that time, he could have reached out his hand, But he deliberately didn't he killed him, For several months, he was completely destroyed by the fact that he killed him, It was then, When he met Itachi, and Itachi thought back, Shisui says his friends death gave him new power that was the Mangekyo Sharigan, it’s called up by a power that comes from a fierce emotional blow, his was probably awakened by my regret over killing my friend, Shisui says kill me Itachi, then you’ll get Mangekyo Sharigan/ MS and then you’ll get even stronger, and says he’s dead either way, so it’s better he dies after leaving him that power, all right do it Itachi, he killed his friend, his hands on the ground where Shisui had stood, tears fell one after another from his eyes, everything felt numb, there where 2 sparks in each eye, in a blind of an eye those sparks became massive flames, and awakened MS.

Note: Shisui is killed which awakens Itachi's MS, next day after his death Itachi is accused of Killing Shisui by 3 clan members Yashiro, Inabi and Tekka Uchiha, the day after that Izumi comes by to tachi's house because of incident day before and talks to Fugaku, after she leaves Fugaku says to himself Itachi soon turns 12 soon it will be time.

Note: Itachi is accused of killing Shisui by Yashiro, Inabi and Tekka Uchiha, in Chapter 221-223, Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 6 Section 1.

Note: Flashback of Shisui when Itachi last saw him, Chapter 550.

Note: Itachi has flashback of Shisui's death and flashback back of leaf council discussing about Uchiha revolution and Itachi and Danzo discuss about the coup and make a deal for Itachi to kill clan and Sasuke will be spared, in Chapter 590.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 6 Section 2, Itachi is now 12, Danzo wants Hiruzen to promote him now to Anbu Leader, with Shisui’s death, the only pawn they have against the Uchiha is Itachi, and raise his official age by a year, and the issue of the rule is resolved itself, Hiruzen says he can’t stop feeling sorry about Shisui’s death, a ninja of his abilities would commit suicide, Danzo was worried about the possibility Itachi known how Shisui died and the note Shisui left behind also bothered him, it was hard for him to believe Shisui had so much time that he had been able to leave a note in his room before throwing himself into the river, the most kill scenario was that Itachi had copied his handwriting and written the note, but still Danzo can use Itachi’s desire for peace to handle the situation, Danzo turns to the man who was meant to be his old friend, and says the Uchiha were quite for a time of Shisui’s death, but recently they’ve started to move again, we won’t be able to avoid an explosion, Hiruzen says he knows he’ll approve Itachi’s promotion.

In name, it's the establishment of a new team due to the increase in the number of Anbu missions, and with a new team comes a new team leader, A position he was selected for, Danzo sitting tall before Itachi in the office of the Foundation mansion, Sugaru was standing behind Danzo, in his usual white tiger mask, he’s asked that the members of this new team come from the Foundation, and he’s obtained Hiruzen's approval, Danzo says he won't be under the Hokage's direct command, nor will he belong to the Foundation, Let's just say this will be a special team, independent within the Anbu, the formation of a new team is just the official line, There are no new personnel, It's simply something they came up with, to allow him to move freely, Even so, he’s thinks they’ll give him a couple of men, the new members will be from the foundation, is also a means to keep the Anbu from becoming suspicious, Just like Shisui Uchiha worked for Hiruzen, he will work for him from now on, Itachi knew these 2 men in front of him killed Shisui, Itachi asks Danzo why he killed him, Danzo says so you know, Itachi says Shisui was trying to stop the clan's coup d'état for the sake of the village, Just as he was about to do that, you interfered, and he died, Danzo says you really think Shisui's actions could have stopped the coup, His actions would have gotten in the way of my own plan to prevent the coup, But Shisui of the Body Flicker, even if he had ordered him not to go forward, he doubt’s he would have been willing to listen, given that he’s not his superior, Danzo says killing me wont prevent the Clan from exploding and the moment he kills his a village official he will be made become a criminal, killing Danzo will solve nothing Itachi had bigger ambitions, that he will put ahead of his personal grudge, and his desire to get vengeance for his best friend and tucked his Kunai away in his vest, and then Itachi started to leave, Danzo said If someone from outside the clan did that, there would certainly be lingering ill will toward the village, Other clans would fear the Uchiha end, and one would inevitably become the next Uchiha, Which is exactly why, Someone from the clan must do it, mentally deranged young person of the clan, If this is what everyone believes, then peace can come to the village, You are the only one who can fulfill this role, Itachi left and walked out of the Foundation mansion, and walked along the village road at the foot of the Hokage Monument.

The sound of insects Itachi tells Sugaru to show himself, Sugaru says he wants to talk, on his own discretion, Itachi recognised his face before the boy who never spoke on team 2 and join their team after Tenma died and Shinko quit being a ninja, Yoji the Genin, Yoji says Monitoring, Separate from the Hokage’s Anbu, There Is a Monitoring Division through the Foundation solely for the Foundation, Total of 12 people are required to Monitor the People of the village, with just that number of personnel, they can know the movements of the village, and there is one more person who has been ordered to monitor, him ever since he started at the Academy, he has been Watching the person Known as Itachi Uchiha, Itachi wasn’t surprised he had a strange feeling since the day of his graduation Ceremony, when Danzo spoke to him, something like déjà-vu, the feeling that he'd known the man for a long time, If Danzo had started watching him when he entered the academy, then this feeling made sense, Yoji says Danzo has 12 people to monitor the village, the fact he was devoted to watch him soon is proof how much Danzo favours Itachi, Yoji continues to say his father was a terrible man, he was jealous of the fact his son excelled, he was a man who could only show his power by hating and causing pain, and assaulted him for any reason or for no reason, so he knew how to forget pain before he can remember, it was his 5th birthday he accidentally fell of his chair, and spilled juice, on the clothing of his father, sitting in front of him, that day his father was likely in a terrible bad mood, he said his apology sounded cheeky and skit his throat and it was then he killed someone for the 1st time, because of his father, he completely lost his voice, it was only after Danzo took his in that he learned how to speak by making the insects he keeps on his body to make a small noise in resonance, people have darkness within them, he learned that when he was 5 years old however, the darkness he carries is still slight, compared with Danzo, his darkness is a person darkness, but his darkness is the darkness of this village, if he killed him now the darkness that fills that body will spill out all at once, into the village and if that happens this village will not be able to remain sane, you are prepared to shoulder the darkness of your clan, Yoji says do you know Naruto, though imperfect he’s the son of the 4th Hokage, don’t you think it’s strange that because 9 tails is housed in that body, everybody treats him so cruelly, Itachi said Danzo, Yoji says yes Danzo did one thing, he simply made it known that the 9 tails that plunged the village into terror, was housed in the body of that child, the people of the village then made their own judgements, and decided t discriminate against Naruto, with this terrifying child, as their just cause, they shifted responsibility to someone else and now the people turn a cold shoulder to Naruto, and by looking down on the poor child, the main emotional equilibrium, your Clan fulfils a small role to Naruto, isn’t that so, Itachi says you’re saying Danzo is also pulling the strings behind the Uchiha discrimination too, Yoji says that is an enmity before Danzo was born, it’s not good to make everything his fault.

Note: Chapter 583 Kabuto says it's been 5 years since he left village and he's attacked by his mother Nono and killed her, making him 14.

Kabuto goes with Orochimaru in Chapter

583-584 and joins him.

Note: Sasuke Jinraiden Chapter 2 Kina states 10 years ago his and Reishi's father Tenma defeated an immortal monster that terrorised the village and consumed peoples chakra but Tenma died in the act and the Howling Wolf Village in Land of Medicines stopped being a ninja village for hire.

In Sasuke Jinraidem Chapter 4 Reishi explains that the Kodon clan sealed Roen into their shrine long ago. When his father broke that seal, he controlled it using his special saigenzai, but the control was broken during its attack on the village. Reishi's parents tried to seal it back into the shrine, but his mother was killed before they had the chance and his father wasn't able to do it alone. Doing what he could, he sealed Roen into the infant Kina at the cost of his life, which was 10 years ago.

Year 56: (Uchiha Massacre)

(Land of Lightning)

Kintoki, Tomaru Minakura,

Note: Kintoki said to be 9 in 4th Databook Character detail list chapter 493 when Killer Bee is sparing with him on Land of lightning Turtle Island.

Note: Tomaru said to be 8 in 3rd Databook character detail list in chapter 247 when Naruto returned to Konoha a few days ago.

Note: Flashback of Naruto in Academy and Kiba and few other students get transferred to Naruto's class, which Iruka and Kiba state he's been in Academy for 3 years in Chapter 75. Which Naruto would be 8 or 7 turning 8 because Itachi speaks to Naruto at 11 turning 12 that year in Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night when Naruto was in Academy, which Naruto would be 6 turning 7, we also normally see Kiba with Akamaru but Akamaru isn't born until Kiba is 9, so if Naruto's been in academy for 3 years here's likely 8 or 7 turning 8 so he entered academy when he was 4 going to turn 5 since it's stated in Naruto the last: Naruto the movie novel prologue in page 11, that he was preparing to enter the academy in March.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 6 Section 3, Itachi in a small dark room, a man in a monkey mask sitting indent of him, He carried out his duties matter-of-factly, processing the mountain of documents piled on the desk, Papers covered in dense text, papers that looked like blueprints, There were also some pages with photos of faces attached to them, All were documents related to the Uchiha clan, Itachi was in the room given to him in the Foundation mansion, It's been a year since then, Time flies, the man in the monkey mask said, His voice sounded like he was still just barely 20, Itachi had known the face under the mask since he was little, He had seen it any number of times since the Uchiha clan was forcibly moved to the compound on the edge of the village, Kagen Uchiha, Itachi had only learned his name once they started working together, Kagen was an unremarkable man, in a logistical operations division in the Military Police Force, His rank was genin, and he didn't have any particularly spectacular techniques, At the meetings, he never voiced his own thoughts, but rather, always followed the opinions of other people, The man before his eyes was a member of the Foundation, The real Kagen was dead, The man before him had a twin, a little brother with the same physique and chakra, The two had both been given Kagen's face, these twins were the Foundation members Sugaru had said were investigating the movements of the Clan, The fact that Kagen worked in a logistics division meant that he hadn't had any opportunities to activate the sharingan, Thus, due to the fact that during his lifetime, he had been thoroughly unremarkable, and the fact that he had no close relatives, no one suspected anything when he was secretly replaced, The roots of the village reached that deeply into the Uchiha Clan, The real name of the man in the monkey mask was Gozu.

His younger brother was Mezu, Gozu says Because Shisui died, the radical faction was forced to revise their plan, and postpone the day of action, So his death delayed the coup d'état, which is a bit of irony, The subordinates given to Itachi after Danzo made him an Anbu team leader were Gozu and Mezu, Isolated from the other Anbu teams, Itachi's role was to watch the Uchiha clan very closely, along with these two men, Gozu says They were going to use Shisui's teleportation to charge the Residence and abduct the 3rd Hokage, That was the basic idea, So, he suppose it is only natural that Shisui's death would slow their movements, Gozu had noted, one of the key elements of the plan put together by his father and the others was the abduction of the 3rd Hokage, The Military Police Force would strike a blow against the village ninjas by kidnapping their leader, Those ninjas would attack them, and they would fight back, buying time and forcing the village to accept the demands of the Clan, That was the overall concept of the coup, Their demands were four, Uchiha participation in the center of the village, dismantling of the compound, the freedom to choose where they lived, and Fugaku Uchiha named as the fifth Hokage, Itachi couldn't believe the village would accept such impossible demands, but the members of the radical faction seriously intended to push them, Mezu's face was a monkey mask just like Gozu's, The only difference was the color of the markings, Gozu's were red, while Mezu's were blue, In the compound, one of them would pretend to be Kagen, and watch over the Clan, Gozu being here meant that Mezu had to be in the compound, Mezu says There's a clan meeting today, and apparently, Fugaku's going to tell everyone the date of the action and their assignments, Mezu said to Gozu he’s the one going to the meeting right, Gozu nodded, Itachi goes to meeting so does Gozu as Kagen, Itachi says stop this foolishness and Yashiro and Inabi get mad at the meeting, Itachi asks his father does he really think he can win, Yashiro starts talking and Fugaku tells him to be quiet glared at him with his sharigan and says Winning or losing is secondary, the fact that they acted is key, When they act, the people of the village will know the discrimination they Uchihas have been subject to, Then they will fear them, and the village will change, Itachi says You are already feared, That's why the clan was gathered together in one place, and driven to the edge of the village, Fugaku says That was the vague fear of the 9 Tails' attack, this time, it will be a fear accompanied by real pain, The nature of it is different, People in meeting started saying Traitor talks big, get out, all the hatred focused on Itachi, Itachi turned his back to his father and then walked lifelessly towards the door he himself had left open, Izumi grabs him saying wait says it’s all right, if he doesn’t go back they’ll think he’s a traitor, Itachi says he doesn’t care what they think, he walked home alone on a road shrouded the darkness, the compound was quiet, since the majority of the Clan were taking part at the meeting, Itachi sees Mezu and he say end of the line huh that’s it, Itachi says I wonder how they they’re gonna pin down the 3rd Hokage aka the Professor, Mezu laughs and then says isn’t it about time they have to report the results of their investigation to the senior officials.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 6 Section 4, Koharu says this can’t be tolerated after hearing Itachi’s report, an interrogation room in the Hokage residence, used when the 4 ninja’s who comprised the village executive were receiving critical reports, 4 black chairs re set up at the long table and seated in them from left to right, were Homura Mitokado, the 3rd Hokage Hiruzen, Koharu Utatane and Danzo Shimura, Itachi requested a emergency meeting to report the current Clan situation, which he had been investigating together with Gozu and Mezu, in the year since he had been made team leader as well as details of the incident at the meeting the previous day, according to Gozu, who had remained at the meeting after Itachi left, the details of the Plot had been made known, the date of coup d’état is 10 days from now, the plan was to begin with the Hokage attack team led by Yashiro, Koharu says If they are calling for revolution, and intending to usurp the government, then we will be forced to declare the Uchiha traitors to Konoha, Hiruzen says Koharu stop Don't get ahead of things, Danzo says But, Hiruzen, The Uchiha clan can no longer be stopped, In which case, in order to avoid chaos, we must strike as soon as possible, That also means the children, who know nothing of this plot, Hiruzen snapped saying That is not something to be said in front of Itachi, and if it comes to civil war with the Uchihas, it will be no simple matter, We must have some kind of plan, Danzo says we must strike first, before they can act, If Hiruzen and him join together, along with their Anbu, for a surprise attack from behind, it will soon be over, Hiruzen says The Uchiha were there comrades-in-arms, Rather than force, he’d like to try talking with them, he’ll think of a plan, Hiruzen might have said all that, but when push comes to shove, he'll protect Konoha, He's that kind of man, and when push does come to shove, he'll have to take firm measures as the Hokage.

Danzo told Itachi quietly, as they stood in the courtyard of the Foundation mansion, the coup, in 10 days, The time had come at last, He would finally be able to remove the biggest obstacle threatening the security of the village, Danzo trembled with glee at being able to personally put an end to the history of enmity that went back to the founding of Konoha, He had already grasped Danzo's true intentions, Or rather, the idea had sprouted in Itachi's own heart when his brethren accused him of the death of his good friend Shisui, That idea was now simply overlaid on the image Danzo had spent long years drawing, Yes, The two of them standing in that spot at the moment were of one mind, Whether it turns into a war or not, Danzo began calmly, looking at the silent Itachi, at the moment the coup occurs, the fate of the Uchihas will be annihilation, The plan the Uchihas had put together was simply too crude, Swept away in a flood of emotion, they overestimated their own power, To him, their plan was like a sad little poem written by a sentimentalist despairing of this world, and ending his own life, He did find it a little sad that the genius Itachi had been born into such a sorry Clan, But no one could escape fate, At the moment he was born an Uchiha, Itachi's path was set, The path of destruction, Danzo readied himself to scatter the bait, Including your little brother, who knows nothing of all this, But if it's before the coup, there is a way to save your brother, at least, Danzo was the sort of man who took every precaution, and Itachi's brother's life, in compensation for the extermination of the Uchiha, was too good of a deal, once it actually happens, your brother will learn about everything, If he sees his clan obliterated by the ninjas of Konoha, he will come to nurture a desire for vengeance on the village, First, focus Itachi's thoughts on Sasuke, Then turn Itachi's eyes away from his brethren's obliteration, and give him a just cause, in the name of saving his little brother's life, Once that happens, there'll be nothing left but to have his brother die, Or will he side with them in Konoha, and obliterate the Uchihas before the coup, leaving only your brother alive, This mission can only be given to a double agent for both Uchiha and Konoha, There is only you, Itachi, Itachi himself would have known that, If someone from outside the clan were put to the task of annihilating the Uchihas, the other clans in the village would be dissatisfied with the village officials, this is likely a painful mission for him, However, in exchange, he will be able to make sure his brother survives, Danzo says Will he accept this mission, and Itachi disappeared, 12 years of life in this world Itachi had almost no memories of crying, Itachi was thinking if Shisui was alive would be forgive him for obliterating the Clan, probably not he would have tried to protect the Clan to the end and in which cause they would’ve been enemies, maybe it was fortunate they parted that day as friends, Itachi had already made up his mind, He had had a feeling, somehow, that this time would come, from the moment his friend died a year earlier, and he lost hope in the clan-from the instant those evil feelings sprang up in his heart, The insurrection of the clan, chaos in the village, and then civil war, Other villages would invade to take advantage of the ruined Konoha, Fighting begat fighting, and a new Shinobi World War would break out, At the center of this chain of hatred was the Uchiha Clan, His father's words came back to life in his mind, Determination, The decision he was about to make was a parting from the Clan, Itachi says this is the best move, and he returned home that day his family was already asleep.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 6 Section 5, Itachi at the Foundation mansion says to Danzo he will do it, Danzo says Don't worry about his brother, Even after he disappears, the village will take care of him, Itachi was going to slaughter his Clan, Even if it were a mission, it was the sort that could never be made public, To the outside world, Itachi would be a criminal who had gone mad, and murdered his entire Clan, Naturally, he would not be able to stay in the village, At that point, he had no choice but to believe even the words of a man like Danzo, Danzo says The day will be the day before the planned date of the coup, The mission this time was a surprise strike, A sneak attack, to wipe out a clan that suspected nothing. The night before the coup, the members of the clan would refrain from going out, in order to build up their courage and make their preparations. It was easy to see what they would do. Additionally, their thoughts would be full of the next day's action, so it shouldn't even occur to them that they would be ambushed, Itachi says understood, Danzo says he’ll tell Hiruzen he’s desperately trying to reconcile them with the village, after his mission he would take on the crime of murdering his clan for the sake of peace in the village, Itachi asks what will he do about Kagen the person from the Clan Goku and Mezu played, Danzo says one of them will have to die, if he sees Kagen go ahead and kill him, the ninjas of the Foundation do not fear even death for the sake of their missions, Gozu and Mezu would both gladly die, Do not hesitate, If anyone other than you is missing from the Uchiha Clan, his actions will have been for naught, At that time, he won't be able to guarantee his brother's life, Danzo added threateningly, He apparently had serious doubts about Itachi's determination, The almost pathetic suspicions of a man who did not know the word trust, Itachi says understood, Danzo says Best if they do not meet again before his mission is complete, This is the last time he will speak with him as a ninja of Konoha, be has worked hard for the village up to now, and he thanks him, Itachi walked through the doorway and as the door closed behind him, he said to himself he will be a Konoha ninja until he dies, the Coup d’état was drawing near, 3 more days, there was something Itachi had to take care of before then, Itachi had been watching over Naka Shrine, ever since he left Danzo, and he had the feeling he was about to seethe fruits of that labor, The door to the main building opened, and a man stepped out, and scanned the surrounding area, He had white hair, Yashiro, Without waiting for him to disappear, Itachi came to stand in front of the closed door, He easily opened the lock, and stepped inside so quickly the cameras couldn't see him, Don't go anywhere just yet, he prayed silently to the man who was his target.

He deftly pulled up the seventh tatami mat from the far right, revealing stairs that led to the basement, The secret meeting place, He ran down, and pulled open once more the door he had closed a few days earlier, the hateful voices of his brethren raining down on him, In the very back of the meeting hall, there was a stone monument with the history of the Uchiha clan carved into it, The man he was after was standing in front of it, A man in an orange mask, the Mask Man says Itachi it’s been a while, it was their first meeting since the time Tenma was killed, 4 years since then, You've grown quite a bit, the man in the mask said, spreading his arms, Itachi says what are you up to Madara Uchiha, Madled Man says You never know when someone's going to come down here, and the compound is watched by those fellows in the village, How about we go somewhere else, and talk a little, Follow me, The man climbed the stairs up to the main shrine, and went outside, Perhaps he knew the precise locations of the clearly hidden cameras, he headed straight out of the compound as if choosing a path in their blind spots, and then easily slipped past even the eyes watching the village, to step beyond it, Once they had gone a little ways from Konoha, the road that led to Sunagakure came into view, There was a small shrine in one corner, and a vast forest spread out as if to guard it, Once he had cloaked himself in these woods, the man stopped running, The moon hanging above the grove of cedar trees was slightly distorted, on the verge of being a perfect circle, Masked man says how does he know who he is, Itachi says he made it past the guards and was looking at the Uchiha tablet, only Uchiha’s know it’s location, and looked into himself d took the opportunity to investigate what kind of person he is and how he thought, as a result Itachi learned that the man before his eyes was Madara Uchiha, 70 years ago Madara had supposedly died after a fierce battle with Hashirama Senju the 1st Hokage, but no one confirmed that death, With the attack on the daimy of the Land of Fire 4 years earlier, and his sniffing around the clan compound, Itachi had sensed Madara had an attachment to the village that was related to the Uchihas. And then, that evening, he had learned that Yashiro was meeting with him, and Itachi's suspicion turned into certainty, Madara had harboured hatred for both Konoha and the Uchiha, Itachi could not allow him to take this revenge on Konoha, he has conditions, He cut through Madara's arrogant attitude, he can help him get revenge on the Uchiha Clan, and in exchange, he doesn’t lay a hand on the village, Or Uchiha Sasuke, too, He would force the point of the spear turned toward the village back toward the Clan, If you refuse this request, then him and Itachi are enemies, Mask Man says you have the wrong idea that brat Yashiro is not my friend or anything of the like, and says choosing him sounds more interesting than those small fry in the Village, he likes this tale he tells, he’ll come along for the ride.

It’s said Madara died 70 years ago, but the 1st Fanbook and 1st Databook both stated the village was founded 60 years ago which Naruto is 12 when this is stated.

Note: Itachi meets with Masked Man which he thinks is Madara which actually is Obito and asks him to help with Massacre and not to harm sasuke nor the leaf village, in Chapter 590, Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 6 Section 5.

Note: Uchiha Massacre happens a year after Shisui's death which Itachi was 11 turning 12 soon when he died, the massacre happens a year after his death, making Itachi 12 turning 13, also Sasuke states he's 7 in Chapter 145 & 224 he's 7 turning 8.

10 days before Massacre Itachi in Anbu with Root reading stuff on coup.

Note: Day of Uchiha Massacre, in Chapter 55, 127, 145-146, 223-225, 344, 385, 398-401, 403, 463, 590, Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 6 Section 6-7.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 6 Section 6, Itachi starts at Izumi’s House and knocks Hazuki, Izumi’s mother out with his Sharigan and then use’s Tsuyukomi on Izumi the time pass in the Genjutsu was one 100th of one 1,000th of one 1,000,000th of the real world, and in the Genjutsu was peace and Itachi free from his troubles, Izumi becomes Chunin at that time Itachi was already Jonin, he then gives Izumi an engagement ring and Izumi marries has kids, and the kids setting out, Izumi grew old with Itachi 70 years since they met, the hair on both white, Izumi has an illness and Itachi takes care of her, her last year, the Mangekyo Sharigan consumes enormous amounts of chakra and places a burden on the user, before him Izumi knees gave out under her, and she collapsed smiling, Itachi sliding over held her, Izumi thanks him her voice sounded like that of an 80 year old women, and Itachi says me too, thank you, and Izumi took her last breath and Izumi died, after she died he gently laid her down and then killed Hazuki, Masked Man says so he has begun, he’ll take care of the women and children, he’ll take the west side of the compound and he can take the east, just like they planned at the start, Itachi is annoyed the masked man’s concern and tells him to shut up, Mask man says he’s too young and if he takes to much darkness it will break him, Itachi replies he’s been broken for a long time, and he doesn’t need to worry about him, and continue Massacre before Sasuke got back to compound, Itachi kills Inabi’s wife, then Inabi, then Tekka, then Itachi kills Mezu who is pretending to be Kagen, it been an 1hr since Izumi died many of his brethren to count but kept running, the targets of father, mothers, and then his wife, then a boy old enough to have just started the Academy, stopped moving, heard shriek behind him, it was Yashiro Itachi went after him and killed him, Itachi returned to the area near the entrance of the compound, there was one family left alive only, Fugaku’s family, Sasuke would be home soon, he saw both his parents sitting waiting for him and tells Itachi he’s proud of him, and killed both of his parents and waited for Sasuke to return home and see him.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 6 Section 7, Not even an hr passed since Itachi’s departure, when the Anbu convened in the village to collect the bodies, Danzo walked down a road covered in corpses. He had just left Hiruzen. Upon learning of Itachi's evil act, the Hokage was furious, and he turned the brunt of that on Danzo. Before he made it out of the Hokage's office, he had been dismissed as councilor, and made to promise to dissolve the Foundation.

But now that the tragedy of the annihilation of the Uchiha clan had been achieved, there was no reason for him to cling to the role of councillor, and even if the Foundation were officially dismantled, it was still more than possible for them to go underground and manoeuvre in secret, away from Hiruzen's eyes, In the end, Danzo got what he wanted, Man in a mask with red markings says Danzo, Danzo says what’s wrong Gozu, his red eyes appeared it was Itachi, Danzo said you, Itachi says he’ll be watching If he lays a hand on Sasuke, he’ll leak all the village's secrets to enemy Lands, if you lay a hand on Sasuke, he will destroy him, Carve that into his soul, Itachi turned into countless crows, and vanished, Danzo says Don't take his eyes off of him, he muttered to no one, in his ears, he heard the sound of insect wings, Hiruzen says Sneaking all the way in here without anyone noticing, he really is a capable ninja, and smiled, so suppose you determined that no one will be able to hear then in here, Itachi said yes, Hiruzen says he’s already marked your name down in the Bingo Book as an S-rank criminal, he shouldn't be able to infiltrate the village, much less sneak all the way into his bedroom, Will he tell him what he wanted to talk with him about that he would go to such lengths, Itachi says Sasuke, Hiruzen says need to worry, That child's done nothing wrong, they will take care of him as one of the children of the village, no need to worry about Danzo, He's been formally dismissed as councilor, and he also ordered him to disband the Foundation, has already stepped down as councilor, The Foundation has been disbanded, on the surface, But he cannot deny the possibility that he is cultivating it in secret somewhere, he ordered the people who were watching the Uchiha clan to monitor him now, Hiruzen says what will he do now Itachi says there’s an organisation he’s interested in, he’ll watch them from the inside, and if it looks like they're going to act out, he will do whatever he has to stop them, Hiruzen asks the name of the Organisation, Itachi says the Akatsuki.

Itachi in the middle of the woods says show yourself, you’re here aren’t you Aburame man, Sugaru says his sharigan won’t work on him, Itachi says not you, and concentrated his chakra, and boosted his sharingan to the Mangekyo sharingan, He was conscious of the eyes of the insects in Sugaru's body, too many to count, He felt a dull pain in his right eye, It was because he had been overusing the sharingan ever since that night, By sharing his chakra, he assimilate what the insects have seen into his own experience, It's a more effective method than Shadow Clones, The sound of wings disappeared from within Sugaru, At the same time, his body, suddenly gaining gravity, was sucked down to the surface of the earth, Unable to control his body, Sugaru plunged into the ground headfirst, incapable of even landing, Sugaru’s injured vocal cords emitted a real groan, Itachi looked coldly and said this is for Shisui and used Amaterasu black flame sprouted on Sugaru's shoulder. The strange blaze spread, in the blink of an eye, to swallow his entire body. As if trying to abandon their burning host, the insects fled from every hole, but they were all caught up in the dark blaze, This fire will not go out until whatever he’s looking at has completely burned up, he won't let even one of the insects nesting in his escape, Sugaru's cries of agony rang out through the forest, Around him, insects buzzed and fluttered, shrouded in dark flames, They looked almost like black fireflies that bloomed in the daytime.

Shinko and Himuka couldn’t believe the news of the Uchiha massacre, that Itachi would do something like that, and Shinko says he might have been 6 years younger than her but he was more grownup and Himuka says she know what you mean she’s older than him and called him master Itachi.

Note: Itachi Shinden: Book of Dark Night Novel Chapter 6 Section 7, Itachi joins the Masked Man that goes by Madara aka Obito in the Akatsuki and meets Pain, and meets Orochimaru once again, Orochimaru says it’s been 9 years since they last met, Itachi says he left 6 years ago, Masked Man says welcome to the Akatsuki, Orochimaru says I’ll take my leave, we’ll meet again Itachi and disappeared, Masked man says shall we go, 1st to Amegakure the Hidden Rain Village where there base is.

Note: Flashback of Sasuke wakening up in Hospital after Uchiha Massacre and goes to the Uchiha living area which is closed off and sasuke goes in seeing it is empty and goes into his house and knees down Sobbing and goes under Naka shrine to see stone table and then goes to academy which Choji and Shikamaru are also there and Kato and a other student talk about the Uchiha incident and that Sasuke is the only survivor and then he goes to the dock, in Chapter 225.

Note: Chapter 64 it’s stated for the first time in 5 years we’ll be scheduling preliminary rounds for the third examination.

Note: Chapter 345 Flashback of Orochimaru in a 2 man squad with Itachi in Akatsuki and tries to take his body.

It’s stated in Chapter 238 Orochimaru left Akatsuki 7 years ago which Itachi is 18. Could be a round up cause Itachi shows up in leaf in Aug and when Naruto leaves leaf with jiraiya 3 months after Sasuke Retrieval mission which is Dec the Akatsuki state Orochimaru left Akatsuki 7 years ago which Itachi joined Akatsuki at 12 before June when he would turn 13 that year so could be 6 years going to 7 years after Dec so it’s a round up.

It’s stated in Chapter 353 Orochimaru left Akatsuki 10 years ago which Itachi would be 21 turning 22, it could be another round up.

4th Databook states Around 7 Years Ago: Confrontation with Orochimaru, targeting the Sharingan…!! Turning the tables on Orochimaru’s attack aiming for the Sharingan. Orochimaru withdrew from Akatsuki for that chance.

Note: In Chapter 353 Deidara asks Kisame, What kind of fellow is Suigetsu and Kisame says it’s been 10 years, he was a cute little kid, always smiling, and had this quaint little habit of chopping off the arms and legs of his opponents, before beheading them, he was being touted as a reincarnation of Zabuza, The Demon of the Hidden Mist, a real child prodigy. Which Itachi would be 21 turning 22, so the 10 years could be another round up.

Note: Chapter 507 Flashback of Kisame on a mission and Leaf Shinobi shows up with Biki and he kills his comrades and after it he returns to Mist and kills Fuguki and takes Samehada and Obito reveals he’s been controlling the 4th Mizukage Yagura and asks him to join him.

Note: Chapter 508 Flashback of Kisame partners up with Itachi.

Year 57: (Zabuza Mist Coup D’état)

(Land of Fire)

Akamaru 7th of July,

(Land of Lightning)

Fukuemon,

Note: Akamaru said to be 3 in 1st Databook.

Said to be 4 in 2nd Databook.

Said to be 7 in 3rd Databook.

Said to be 8 in 4th Databook.

Note: Fukuemon said to be 8 in 4th Databook Character detail list when Naruto was on Land of Lightning Turtle Island in Chapter 512.

Note: Naruto the Last: Naruto the Movie Novel Prologue Page 13-14, When Naruto is in Academy takes place when Naruto is 8 turning 9, because Sasuke has lost his Clan, which is why he writes no one’s name on bit of paper on who he would want to be with if the world was to end and instead staring out the window resting his chin on his hands, which he lost his Clan at 7 turning 8, also we don’t see Akamaru with Kiba when we normally see them always together which means he’s not born yet, also in Chapter 75 when Kiba gets transferred to Naruto’s class, Iruka and Kiba state Naruto has been in academy for 3 years which we don’t see Akamaru cause he’s not born yet, which Naruto and Kiba would be 8 or 7 turning 8, also we see Sasuke in Chapter 225 after Uchiha Massacre at 7 turning 8 which he’s in the same class Choji and Shikamaru and not in the same class as Naruto, which is why we don’t see Naruto in Sasuke’s class in Chapter 224 and which is why we don’t see Sasuke in Naruto’s class in Chapter 75 when Kiba and some other students transfer to Naruto’s class, so this takes place when Naruto is 8 turning 9 before Akamaru is born and this year is the year when Sasuke, Choji, Shikamaru and some other students got transferred to the same class as Naruto.

Note: Naruto the Last: Naruto the Movie Novel Chapter 2 Page 44-45, 47, Chapter 4 Page 140, Naruto in Memory Bubble Genjutsu and has a Flashback in Academy of Hypothetical if the world was to end, who would you want to be with.

Note: Shikamaru Hiden Chapter 17 Gengo says he’s was originally a Shinobi from Kirigakure also Known as the Hidden Mist Village in Land of Water and he says Zabuza started a coup d’état in Kirigakure, his wish was to bring an ideal world, a world governed by Shinobi, but someone betrayed them and tipped the village off and the coup was exposed, which Zabuza became a missing-nin/ Rouge ninja, at that my younger self had been among those who followed him into exile, but then Zabuza, who needed gold realised his ideals, joined hands with a wealthy merchant, a sham of a mafia Gato and took disgraceful mission requests, which Zabuza said they were dirtying their hands for their ideals and cause, but many turned their backs on him, which he was among those that left his side, which almost 10 years have passed since then.

Note: 2nd Fanbook page 119 talks about the Hidden Mist Village, during it’s dark time when Yagure was 4th Mizukage and how he ruled with terror and how just in recent years Mei has just taken over as 5th Mizukage, but before Mei 5th Mizukage took over the Village was known as the the Village of Bloody Mist, which during Yagura’s rein Zabuza who came to reality of the situation in the village, plotted a coup and tried to kill him.

Note: Chapter 29, 31, 32 Haku Flashback of Zabuza saying he has bad news for him and that he’s leaving the Land tonight, but he’s worn an oath to return one day, as a conqueror who’ll crush them all beneath his feet and to do that, what he needs from him is neither love nor affection and support, what he requires is him being his weapon and tool.

Note: Chapter 30 Kakashi says the day Zabuza deserted the Land of Mist and became a turncoat and a renegade his name and actions were reported to Konoha and they know all about his failed coup and him and his followers staged and about the the attempt to assassinate the Mizukage, which he’s been trying to raise funds for a second attempt and barley staying a jump ahead of the shinobi hunters which brought him there, which is why he’s stoop to working for a parasite like Gato.

Note: Kakashi Hiden Novel Chapter 10 Page 118, Kahyo States Zabuza Momochi, The Man they called the Demon of Kirigakure. He is one of the people who got out the Village as soon as he could. I heard he was such a Gentle boy when he was a child.

Year 58:

(Land of Fire)

Rikumaru, Shu,

Note: Rikumaru said to be 6 in 3rd Databook character detail list in chapter 342, he's owned by the Nara clan.

Note: Shu said to be 3 in 2nd Databook in chapter 151.

Note: Chapter 20 Tazuna Flashback talking about how Inari his grandson met Kaiza the man known as The Hero of their city and Inari’s step father, he says it was about 3 years ago they met.

Year 59:

(Land of Fire)

Tami,

Note: Tami said to be 6 in 4th Databook

Character detail list during pain attack in chapter 421, her grandmother Tame is 61 years older than her.

Note: Flashback of Naruto in Ninja Academy during hand to hand combat drills, in Chapter 538, 694.

Year 60:

(Land of Wind)

Tobimaru,

Note: Tobimaru said to be 5 in 4th Databook character detail list after Kage summit when 4th war is about to start in chapter 488, he is a messenger Hawk and his father is Takamaru.

Said in 4th Databook Takamaru is his father, while the ages don't make sense Takamaru would be 4 when 4th war is about to start while it's said his son Tobimaru is 5 in 4th Databook when 4th war is about to start.

Note: Chapter 20 Tazuna Flashback talking about Kaiza saying he was the man the city needed and he stopped Area D in Land of Waves from being flooded and then Kaiza was called a hero by the people of the city and Inari could not be more prouder of his step father but, Gato came to the city, Tazuna has a Flashback of Kaiza put to death in front of everyone by Gato.

Note: Chapter 11 Tazuna says Gato took control over Land of Waves about a year ago.

Note: Chapter 84, 86, 179-180 Flashback of Team Guy being Formed.

Note: Chapter 84, 668 Flashback of Lee training and Guy comes to talk to him says he wants to prove that a person that can’t use ninjutsu or genjutsu can still become a splendid ninja.

Note: Chapter 85 Guy Flashback of Lee on his Team and he teaches him the 8 inner gates.

Year 61: (Tsunade becomes Hokage)

(Land of Wind)

Takamaru,

Note: Takamaru said to be 3 in 3rd Databook Character detail list chapter 250 when Gaara is kidnapped by Akatsuki and sand send him to send Leaf a message for help to send a team to help rescue Gaara the Kazekage.

Said in 4th Databook Tobimaru is his son, while the ages don’t make sense Takamaru would be 4 when 4th war is about to start while it’s said his son Tobimaru is 5 in 4th Databook when 4th war is about to start.

Note: In Chapter 1 Naruto gets into Trouble for vandalising the Hokage Face’s on Hokage Rock with paint and Iruka scolds him saying Tomorrow is the Shinobi Academy’s Graduation Exam and he’s failed it the last 2 times and this isn’t the time to cause trouble, which Iruka says time for Transformation Jutsu, everyone line up and transform perfectly, which instead Naruto does Sexy Jutsu, Which Iruka says don’t invent stupid skills, which then Naruto is made to clean off the paint on Hokage Rock, which Iruka says he won’t let him go until it’s all cleaned up and Naruto says as if he cares it’s not like he has anyone to go home to, which Iruka says if everything’s cleaned dup he’ll buy him some Ramen tonight, which Naruto says he’ll work hard as he can, and both go to Ichiraku Ramen’s for some Ramen, Iruka asked Naruto why was he doing that to the Hokage faces, doesn’t he know who they are, which Naruto says of course he knowns those who get the Hokage title are the strongest shinobi of this village and among them is the 4th Hoakge the hero who saved the village from a fox demon and one day he’s going to get the hokage title and then he will surpass all the previous Hokage’s and then make the village acknowledge his strength and then asks Iruka if he can borrow his head band, which Iruka says this is what you get after you graduate, it’s a symbol that you’ve come of age, maybe you’ll get one tomorrow.

Note: Chapter 13 Naruto Flashback asking Iruka can he borrow his headband.

Note: In Chapter 1 Naruto takes Graduation Exam, Iruka says to Gradute youll have to do the Clone Technique, which is a E Rank Jutsu, Iruka says when you’re called come to the next room, which Naruto goes to next room to perform but the clone is a dud and he fails, which Mizuki says this is his 3rd time and he did create a clone and should let him pass, which Iruka says no way Mizuki all the other students created two clones and Naruto only created one clone and it was a dud and can’t let him pass, then Naruro sits on his Swing watching his Classmates Graduate, Naruro talks with Mizuki as the sun sets and says he wish he Graduated which Mizuki says in that case I’ll tell you a secret, Naruto then sneaks into Hiruzen the 3rd Hokage’s House at night and knocks him out with Sexy Jutsu and steals the Forbidden Scroll of Seals and hides in the woods reading the Shadow Clone and Multi Shadow Clone jutsu’s.

Note: Naruto Gaiden Chapter 8 Naruto Flashback failing Academy Graduation and on swing watching his classmates graduate and Naruto talking to Mizuki as the sun sets.

Note: In Chapter 1 Mizuki goes to Iruka’s place telling him they must go to the 3rd Hokage’s place, Naruto has taken the scroll of the forbidden seals as a prank, other shinobi’s are mad and Hiruzen says yes that is a dangerous scroll forbidden by the pervious Hokage and if used in a certain way it could cause incredible danger and it’s been half a day since the scroll was taken they must hurry and find Naruto, which Iruka searched the woods and finds Naruto, which Naruto says he found him and he’s only learned one thing from the scroll and Iruka says you look all beaten up what were you doing and Naruto says he’s going to try an incredible jutsu if he does it let him graduate and Iruka asks where did he get the scroll, which Naruto says Mizuki told him about it and about this place too he said if he showed him this skill he’d definitely graduate and then Mizuki tries to kill Naruto and Iruka pushes him out the way taking the attack and Iruka sees what’s going on now, Mizuki tells Naruto to give him the Scroll, Iruka tells Naruto whatever happens don’t give Mizuki the scroll, it’s a dangerous scroll that has forbidden ninjutsu written in it and Mizuki used him to get his hands on it, which Mizuki says there’s no point in him having it and says 12 years ago you know about the demon fox being sealed right, since that day a speical rule was created for this village, but it was never meant to be told to you, the rile is that nobody is allowed to talk about the fact that he is the 9 tailed demon fox and doesn’t he think its odd how everyone hates him and Mizuki throws his Fuma Shuriken at Naruto and Iruka jumps in front of him and says Naruto must’ve been in a lot of pain he’s sorry if only he done a better job he wouldn’t have to feel like this, Mizuki talks about Naruto getting revenge and he’s a demon, Iruka says he’s not like that, Mizuki is transformed as Iruka and Iruka is transformed as Naruto and attack Mizuki, Mizuki says there’s now way that demon wouldn’t use the power of the scroll, Iruka says yeah the fox demon would do that but Naruto is different and has acknowledge him as one of his excellent students and he may not be the hardest worker and he’s clumsy and nobody accepts him and he already knows what it is to feel pain inside his heart but he isn’t the demon fox, he is a member of the Hidden Leaf Village and then Mizuki ties to kill Iruka and Naruto stops him by attacking him and Naruto says don’t touch Iruka sensei or he’ll kill him and then uses Multi Shadow Clone Jutsu with over 1,000 clones surrounding Mizuki and beats Mizuki, then Iruka says to Naruto come over here there’s something he wants to give to you and puts his headband on him saying congratulation on gradating lets celebrate and he’ll buy him a cup of Ramen.

Note: Naruto Gaiden Chapter 8 Naruto Flashback stealing Forbidden Scroll of Seals and him Graduating the Academy.

Note: Chapter 13 Naruto Flashback of Iruka giving him his headband and says Congratulations on Graduating.

Naruto Graduate’s in March since Japan schools Graduate in late March and it’s stated Naruto Graduated Academy at 12 in 1st, 2nd and 3rd Databooks which his Birthday is in October, also Chapter 3 Expired Milk Carton looks like it says Mr for March.

Note: In Chapter 2 Genzo takes Naruto picture for his Ninja registration and Hiruzen the 3rd Hokage sees it and Naruto says it took him ages to come up with a good face, 3 hours later he decided to make this one and Hiruzen says retake it and where’s his headband, Naruto says he’s saving it for tomorrow’s ceremony and he doesn’t want it scratch, Hiruzen says this is a Shinobi Registration Book lists all of the Shinobi of this village and their abilities this is a very important document so what’s up with the face.

Note: In Chapter 2 Then Konohamaru Charges in and falls and meets Naruto causing him of tripping him when he tripped over himself and Naruto is told by Ebisu to let go of him he’s the 3rd Hokage’s Grandson which Naruto says you think he give a damn and punches him on the head and leaves, which Konohamaru follows him and says he’ll make him his boss if he teaches him the sexy jutsu which defeated his grandpa and Naruto starts teaching him, Konohamaru says why he wants to beat his grandpa it’s cause people refer to him as lord 3rd’s grandson instead of calling him by his name he wants to be acknowledged so he wants the Hokage title, which Naruto says if he wants the title that bad then Beat him first.

Note: In Chapter 2 Iruka talks to Hiruzen saying did Naruto show up for his shinobi registration, he lectured Naruto at the Ramen place yesterday But he’s so bent on becoming a great shinobi and have the whole village acknowledge his strength, Hirzuen says Naruto’s dream may be impossible as you know the only people that know Naruto has 9 tailed demon fox inside of him are the shinobi that fought him 12 years ago and he made a law not to mention that to everyone and he’s severely punished those who’ve broken that law, so the children don’t know, this is the only thing Naruto has going for him, the 4th Hokage wanted the people of Konoha to see Naruto as a hero this was his last wish, the 4th sealed the 9 tails into a new born baby, Naruto became the container of the 9 tails demon fox but the adults of this village don’t see Naruto this way, not only that, but because of their attitude towards him the children act the same, when a person hates and doesn’t acknowledge someone’s existence their eyes when they look at him are frighteningly cold, Ebisu find Konohamaru and Konohamaru uses Sexy Jutsu on him and Naruto uses Multi Shadow Clone Jutsu and then uses Harem Jutsu, then Naruto says to Konohamaru he better prepare himself if he wants an incredible title like Hokage which everyone will acknowledge there aren’t going to be any shortcuts, which Konohamaru says from now on we’re rivals, Naruto says sorry but tomorrow he’s taking my first step as being a shinobi but one day he’ll fight him for the Hokage Title and will be looking forward to it.

Note: Chapter 427 Konohamaru has a Flashback of the promise he made long ago with Naruto, that he’ll have to get past Naruto 1st, from this day forward they will be arch-rivals, one day they will fight over the Name Hokage, and Naruto says he looks forward to that day Konohamaru.

Note: In Chapter 3 Naruto wakes up for his ninja graduation ceremony and has breakfast and Milk and then goes to his class for his ceremony and Naruro stands on table were Sasuke is siting and someone bumps into him making him fall and lean in kissing Sasuke which Sakura gets mad, Iruka says starting today all of you are real shinobi but you are still genin, the hard journey that lies ahead has just started, now they will soon receive missions to help the village so today they will create the 3 man teams and each will have a Jonin Sensei and they will follow their sensei’s instructions in order to successfully complete their missions and they try to balance team’s strength, Team 7 Sakura, Naruto and Sasuke, Naruto asks Iruka why he’s on Sasuke’s Team and Iruka says his grades were the best of all 27 Graduates and yours were dead last, they have to do this to balance the teams, then says this afternoon we’ll introduce your Jonin Sensei until then take a break, Naruto says only time Sasuke has an opening is when he’s eating so he sneaks behind him ties him up and uses Transformation Jutus to turn into Sasuke and pretends to be him with Sakura but he get the runs and runs to the toilet, then Sasuke unties himself and sees Sakura and says where’s Naruto, which she says don’t change the subject who cares about him all he does is start fights with him and he doesn’t have a normal childhood and doesn’t have parents he can do whatever he wants, if she acted like that her parents would ground her for months, he’s so lucky all alone, parents never saying what to do and what not to do, that’s why he always makes trouble, Sasuke gets annoyed and says the feelings of a parent yelling at is nowhere near what Naruto feels and calls Sakura annoying, then Naruto finishes with the toilet and runs into Sasuke, Hiruzen Shows Kakashi where Naruto lives and says Naruto isn’t smart but he thinks giving Naruto to him is the best he has a nose for these types plus his team will also have Sasuke of the Uchiha clan good luck, Kakashi notices the milk expired a couple of days ago and after hearing about his team he says this could be troublesome.

Note: In Chapter 4 Team 7 are still waiting for their Team Sensei which he’s late and all the other Teams have gone with their Sensei’s and Iruka also left, which Naruto does a prank for their Sensei being late which Kakashi gets caught in the trap, then Kakashi asks them to introduce themselves and gives them examples, Kakashi introduces himself, then Naruto and then Sasuke and lastly Sakura, Kakashi says Tomorrow they’ll start out duties as shinobi’s, first they are going to do something between the four of them, survival training and its not normal training this time their opponent is him, then Kakashi says out of the 27 Graduates only 9 will be chosen to become a Genin the rest will be sent back to the academy, this training is a very difficult exam it has a fail rate of over 66%, which Naruto says What was the point of Graduating which Kakashi says oh that, that was to select those who have the chance to become Genin, anyway tomorrow you have to show your skills in the training ground bring all the shinobi tools you have oh and skip breakfast you might throw up, the details are on this paper and don’t be late tomorrow, Naruto training that night with a motionless Kakashi doll in his bedroom.

Note: Chapter 675 Kakashi Flashback of asking Team 7 to Introduce themselves.

Note: In Chapter 4 Next day after Team 7 Introduction Kakashi shows up late and sets clock for noon there are two bells and their task is to take them from him before the time’s up, those who don’t have a bell by noon get’s no lunch and he’ll not only tie them to one of those stumps but he’ll also eat right in front of them, they only have to get one bell, there are only two so one of you will definitely be tied to the stump and the person who doesn’t take a bell fails so at least one of you will be sent back to the academy, if they want they can use shuriken’s and kunai’s and they won’t succeed unless they come at him intending to kills and then Naruto starts to attack before Kakashi has said they have started, then says Begin.

Note: Chapter 246 Kakashi Flashback of Naruto attacking him, before he says go to start the Bell test.

Note: In Chapter 5 Bell test starts only Naruto is fighting Kakashi while Sasuke and Sakura are hiding, Chapter 6 Bell test Naruto gets caught in a trap and then Sasuke starts to attack, Naruto breaks out trap and gets caught in another, Sakura is place under a genjutsu, Chapter 7 Bell test Sasuke attacks Kakashi and gets trap in the ground and Naruto finds the food and tries to eat it but is caught by Kakashi and the alarm starts ringing letting them know its noon which 10mins later Naruto is tied up to stump and Kakashi says you guys look really hungry, by the way something about the training, well there’s no need for you to go back to the academy, all three of you should quit as shinobi, Chapter 8 Bell test Iruka as Hiruzen about Team 7’s Jonin and Hiruzen gives him the list of his past students and their records, Kakashi says they seems like punks who don’t deserve to be ninja’s and Sasuke attacks him which he restrains him and says that’s why you’re a punk and says are you guys underestimating ninjas, why you think that you were divided into teams and are doing this training, basically you guys are not understanding the answer to this test, the answer that helps you pass this test, it’s team work, the three of you working together may have gotten the bells, Sakura says what do you mean by team work, there are only two bells, even if we work together and get the bells, one of us will still fail, what team work, that just makes us fight each other, then Kakashi says of course this test is purposely set up to make you fight amongst yourselves, the purpose is to see weather you can forget about your own interest and successfully work together , under these designed circumstances, yet you guys instead of Naruto who was right next to you, you were only thinking about Sasuke, who was far away, Naruto you were just running around by yourself, Sasuke you just assumed the others would get in your way and tried to do everything yourself, the duties are done but the Team of course superior individuals is important to a ninja but what’s even more important is Team work, Individual play that disrupts the Team can put your comrades in danger and even get you killed for example, Sakura kill Naruto or else Sasuke dies, you see if a hostage is taken you will have tough choices and then die, you will be risking your lives in these duties, look at this the numerous names carved on this stone, these are ninjas that are recognised as the hero’s of this village, which Naruto says he’s decided to get his name carved on that stone too, hero is what he will become, Kakashi says but they aren’t just normal heroes, they are all heroes who died while on duty, this is a memorial, my best friend’s name is also carved here, you guys he will give them one more chance, but after lunch he’ll make it even tougher to get the bells, those who still wish to challenge can eat lunch but don’t give any to Naruto, It’s punishment for trying to eat by yourself, if anyone gives him any food, they will fail immediately, he is the rules here, then Kakashi leaves and Naruto stomach rumbles, Sasuke and Sakura start eating and Sasuke offers Naruto his food and explains why which then Sakura offers her food to Naruto to, which Kakashi is watching from a far, then Iruka sees Kakashi’s past students and their records which they all have zeroes he has never passed anyone they all failed, Kakashi returns to stump where Naruto is tied up and says What is this, you guys pass, you guys are the first, everyone would just do whatever he told them, they were all just morons, a ninja must see underneath the underneath, those who break the rues and codes of the ninja world are call trash, but you know what, those who don’t take care of their comrades are lower than trash, that ends the training all of yous pass, Starting tomorrow Team 7 will begin it’s duties.

Note: Chapter 13 Naruto Flashback of Kakashi calling him, Sasuke and Sakura Punk, Who don’t deserve to be Ninja’s, and they will be risking their lives on missions.

Note: Chapter 218, Naruto Gaiden Chapter 4 Flashback of Bell test Sasuke and Sakura share their food with Naruto.

Note: Chapter 13 Flashback of Kakashi telling Team 7 that they have Passed the Bell test.

Note: Chapter 218, 227, 484, 675, 698 Flashback of Team 7 being Formed.

Note: Chapter 533 Choji Flashback becoming Genin and is outside the ninja academy.

Note: Chapter 328 Flashback of Team 10/ Team Asuma being formed and Team 10 members meeting Asuma.

Note: Chapter 78 Hinata Flashback of her going in Team 8/ Team Kurenai and Kurenai making sure this meet’s Hinata’s father Hiashi’s approval since she supposed to be the heir apparent of the Hyuga Main Branch, which he says do as you please.

Note: Chapter 328 Flashback of Asuma paying for Team 10’s meal.

Note: Chapter 328 Flashback of Asuma giving Shikamaru rules of Shogi so they can play.

Note: Chapter 533 Flashback of Asuma saying hush to Team 10.

Note: Chapter 533 Flashback of Asuma and Team 10 finish eating and Choji is stuffed.

Note: Konoha Shinden Chapter 10 Choji Flashback of Asuma.

Note: Chapter 90 Ebisu Flashback of Konohamaru doing push-ups and says there’s no shortcuts to being Hokage, that’s what Naruto said.

Note: Boruto Two Blue Vortex Chapter 18 Konohamaru Flashback of Moegi calling him Konohamaru-Chan, back when he was in the Academy.

Note: Chapter 10 Naruto Flashback doing sit-ups with his kakashi doll in the background and Flashback of him practicing jutsu’s everyday and balancing stuff on his head.

Note: Chapter 80 Kurenai Flashback of Hinata as a Genin training constantly and desperately.

Note: Chapter 54, 71 Flashback of Sakura and Ino as Genin and Sakura saying She’s on the same team as Sasuke and she’ll never beat her and Ino says that goes double for her and she doesn’t care what it takes, she’s not going to show her up and Sakura returns her ribbon to her.

Note: Chapter 229 Flashback of Naruto calling Sasuke a stupid idiot and Sasuke calling him the idiot.

Note: Chapter 132 Naruto Flashback of Iruka saying it’s been awhile, wan to go get Ramen and Naruto says yay he wants extra pork today.

Note: Chapter 132 Naruto Flashback of Sasuke saying you idiot, if you want to win against me, train harder and Naruto says shut up he won’t lose to him.

Note: Chapter 132 Naruto Flashback of Sakura saying to him What did Sasuke say about her and Naruto says didn’t really say anything to him, but hey don’t you want to know what he thinks about her.

Note: Chapter 218 Naruto Flashback of Sasuke blushing saying what did Sakura say to him.

Note: Chapter 132 Naruto Flashback of Kakashi telling Naruto if he keeps eating just Ramen and red bean soup, he really will die and if he’s going to be a ninja, he needs to eat vegetables and here’s a delivery and Naruto says he hates veggies.

Note: Chapter 132 Naruto Flashback of Team 7 and Iruka and running towards them.

Note: Chapter 229, Naruto Gaiden Chapter 8 Flashback Naruto challenging Sasuke at balancing stuff on his head in Team 7.

Note: Chapter 229 Flashback of Naruto with a grin saying to Sasuke what do ya say to that.

Note: Rin-No-Sho: Scroll of Facing: Konoha Gaiden Side Story: At the Ichiraku…

Note: To-No-Sho: Chapter of Creation: Insect Collection

Note: Fu-No-Sho: Book of Wind: The Truth of His Face….

Note: Chapter 9-33, Land of Waves Mission.

Note: In Chapter 9 Team 7 on a mission to find and Capture Tora the Land of Fire Lord’s wife Madam Shijmi’s Cat, Hiruzen is about to give Team 7 their next duty on babysitting an elder’s grandson shopping in the neighbouring village and help with the potato digging, but Naruto says No thank you, he wants to do, you know more incredible missions, find us a better one, Iruka says you idiot you are just a rookie, everyone starts off with the simple duties and works their way up, Naruto says But they keep getting the crappest possible duties, Kakashi tells him to be quiet, Hiruzen says it seems he ahs to explain to him what these duties are about, listen everyday the village receives numerous request from babysitting to assassination, each request is written down on these lists and divided into an A, B, C, D Ranking based on difficulty, the village is also divided based on skill starting with him the Hoakge to Jonin, Chunin and Genins, the missions are then handed out by them at the top two ninjas based on their abilities and if the duty is completed successfully they receive payment from the client, you guys just recently became Genin, D-Rank Missions are perfect for you, Which Naruto isn’t listening telling his Team that last nigh he had pork ramen, so miso sounds good for, Which Hiruzen says Hey listen and Kakashi says He apologises and Naruto says all yo do is give lecture’s like that and says he’s not the troublemaking brat he still thinks he is, Which Hirzuen says if you want it that much, he’ll give them a C-Rank Mission, it’s a protection mission of a certain individual and Hiruzen introduces the client to them, his name is Tazuna and he’s a super expert bridge builder, which Tazuna expects them to provide him a super protection until he gets back to his country and completes the bridge.

Note: In Chapter 9 Team 7 take land of waves mission, Chapter 11 Kakashi states its spring, which is March-May, but since graduation in Japan is late March then it must be April or May. In Chapter 18 start training, Chapter 21 it’s been 6 mornings of training and then seventh day morning of training, In Chapter 22 next morning, Chapter 33 two weeks later, so was 2 weeks and 8 days.

Note: Chapter 218 Flashback of Naruto and Sasuke training at night in Land of Waves.

Note: Chapter 218, 680, Sasuke Retsuden Chapter 9 Flashback of Sasuke during Land of Waves Mission, Protecting Naruto.

Note: Kakashi has a flashback of Naruto on The Great Naruto Bridge in Land of Waves after Haku and Zabuza’s death in Chapter 524.

Note: Kakashi Hiden Novel Prologue Page 19, Naruto says it’s already been 6 Years since his Land of Waves Mission when he was 12 and was there first Job as Team 7, and that Kakashi, Sakura and even Sasuke were there, and Inari says just in 6 years the Land of Waves has Completely Changed.

Note: Chapter 34-40, Conducting the Chunin Exam, Nomination, Summit Applications, Waiting for Exam to Start and Rules of Exam.

Note: In Chapter 34 the sand siblings arrive to leaf and Team 7 meet them, In Chapter 35 on same day Hiruzen says to make it completely official I hereby announce seven days from now on 1st of July we shall begin conducting examination for the Chuin exam, Kakashi, Kurenai and Asuma put their teams forward for the Chunin exam, which makes it the 24th of June, in Chapter 36 Rock Lee says the Chunin exam are coming up and has heard for the 1st time in 5 years they’re going to let the rookies compete this year, Kakashi tell his team, team 7 that he’s nominated them for the Chunin exam and those who want to take exam have to sign the form and turn them in by 4:00 at room 301 Tomorrow afternoon, which makes it the 30th of June since it’s day before exam, next day they arrive to location and notice there being tricked by a surrounding created by a genjutsu and they go to the next floor, in Chapter 38 team 7 arrive to room 301 and meet Kakashi and enter the room, In Chapter 39 Team 7 meet the other rookie 9 and Kabuto, in Chapter 40 Exam examiner Ibiki and exam officers and proctors arrive and explain the rules and hand out the paper with the questions.

Note: Chapter 86 Guy Flashback of Lee training for the upcoming Chunin exams.

Note: Chapter 40-44, 1st Exam Written Test.

Note: Chunin Exams start on 1st of July in Chapter 41, 1st Exam is a written exam with 10 questions and the applicants have 1 hour to answer the questions and the 10th question is not be provided until 45 mins in the exam, if the 3 man squad get caught cheating 5 times they will be disqualified as a team and In Chapter 41 Naruto hasn’t written anything and the time is 55 mins passed and 10 seconds passed 4pm, in Chapter 42 the time is 3mins and 52 seconds passed 5pm then the time is 8mins and 48 seconds passed 5pm, the time is 14mins and 32 seconds pass 5pm, In Chapter 43 the 10 question which means it been 45 mins since exam started, In Chapter 43, 1st exam finished, In Chapter 44, 78 passed the 1st exam making it 26 teams passed.

Note: Chapter 44-64, 2nd Exam.

Note: 2nd Exam starts in Chapter 45 on same day as 1st exam it takes place at training ground 44 also known as the Forest of Death it is a survival test 13 teams will start with a heaven scroll and the other 13 will start with a earth scroll but need both scrolls to pass, the objective is to get both scrolls and bring them to the tower at the centre, so 13 teams will fail they have 120 hour's to complete the exam which is exactly 5 days, teams must arrive to tower within the time as well with there 3 man squad and with both scrolls and it's forbidden to look at the scroll unit your at the tower, 2nd exam started at 3:33pm on 1st of July, In Chapter 44 Anko tells everyone in exam there’s no time to waste lest go follow her to next location and they arrive to Forest of death which, in Chapter 45 she hands out forms and explains exam and distribute’s the scrolls out and tells them to follow their proctor’s to their respective gates and when the signal sounds in half an hour the exam will begin, which the time says 2:32pm which isn’t correct cause it’s same day as 1st exam so it be a mistake the hr hand and min hand must have been mixed up so the time is 6:15pm, In Chapter 51 day after exam started it’s dawn Sakura has been up all night standing guard watching over Naruto and sasuke while they’re unconscious, In Chapter 57 it’s stated about 10 hours earlier than that around 8:00pm on first day in the Forest Anko tells anbu to take her to tower and she’ll explain why and ask lord Hokage Hiruzen to join them there as well and Anko arrives and is told to look at footage of timestamp a hour and 37mins which is 93mins after the exam exam began the 3 sand sibling have already finished 2nd exam which timestamp says 16:09, Which if there timestamp is 16:09 and it’s 1 hr and 37mins after exam started which means exam started at 14:32 which in Chapter 45 the watch shows it being starting at 14:32 but exam takes place after 1st exam which takes place after 5pm so the min and hr hand must’ve gotten mix up and the exam must have started at 18:15 and sand sibling finished exam at 19:52. In Chapter 57 when Kakashi and team Asuma and team guy are together it’s 6am day after exam start cause it’s stated In Chapter 57 about 10 hours earlier than that around 8pm on 1st day in the forest, In Chapter 58 it’s stated back tracking even earlier from the time indicated on the video surveillance tape day one of exam approximately 50mins after the start of the 2nd Exam Team Kurenai watch the 3 Sand Sibling encounter Rain village 3 man squad in Exam, In Chapter 59 Gaara kills Shigura, Midare and Baiu, In Chapter 60 Sakura states the 2nd exam is to last 5 days and 4 days have already passed and they had to split up from the rest of the teams from Konoha and had to spend 2 days letting their wounds heal, In Chapter 61 Team 7 team up with Kabuto and head to tower they get in view of the tower at night, In Chapter 63 Team 7 steal the heaven stroll form Rain village team Oboro, Mubi and Kagari, next day Team 7 go in tower and open seal door and are given instructions what to do with scrolls. The 2nd exam finished in Chapter 64, on the 6th of July with 7 teams passing meaning 21 applicants passing in accordance with the bylaws governing chunin exams for the 1st time in 5 years they'll be scheduling preliminary rounds for the 3rd Examination.

Note: Karin has flashback taking the 2nd exam in chunin exam in the forest of death, in Chapter 482.

Note: Chapter 65-87, Preliminary Exam.

Note: Naruto the Last: Naruto the Movie Novel Chapter 2 Page 45, Naruto in Memory Bubble Genjutsu and has a Flashback of him vs. Kiba in Chunin Exam Preliminary Rounds.

Note: Preliminary Rounds start on same day the 2nd Exam finished on 6th of July.

Note: Chapter 88-98, The Requisite Preparation Period.

Note: In Chapter 89, After the Preliminary Rounds finished Naruto went looking for Kakashi to train him and instead gets Ebisu, in Chapter 90 same day they start training and meet Jiraiya, in Chapter 91 Naruto is able to walk on water after Jiraiya fixes his seal, Jiraiya says he’ll start the training tomorrow, Chapter 92 Dosu is killed by Gaara on the night of the 6th of July and Baki kill’s Hayate, In chapter 93 Kakashi has flashback of earlier that day Hiruzen telling him and other leaf Shinobi that Hayate’s body was found this morning near Kikyo Castle which he died the night before, In Chapter 92 next day after Jiraiya meets Naruto he starts training Naruto and he summons a tadpole on 7th of July, in Chapter 93, 15 days pass by since the start of training and Naruto can still only summon a tadpole, which makes it the 22nd of July, in Chapter 94 three weeks since the start of training and Naruto is still Summoning a tadpole but this time it’s much bigger, Jiraiya says Naruto passed out and it’s to be expected for the last 21 days and Jiraiya says he’ll have to teach him the hard way and says forgive me 4th Hokage and he says to Naruto when he wakes up, his training will end today, which was on the 28th of July, In chapter 95 half a day earlier Baki and sand siblings return to Sand village to report to Kazekage and talk about mission on destroying Konoha, which is on 27th of July, In Chapter 95 Naruto’s last day of training Naruto summons Gamabunta, In Chapter 96 Gamabunta let’s Naruto rest in hospital, Naruto wakes up after being unconscious for 3 days, which is on the 31st of July.

Note: Chapter 143 Kakashi Flashback of meeting with Jiraiya and Jiraiya says he’ll look after Naruto, ever since Orochimaru left the village he’s been watching him, because he knew that someday he would come back to the village, so he was solely concerned about Orochimaru, which he then joined an Organisation, the Akatsuki and it consists of 9 ninjas and they are all wanted criminals and S rank rouge ninjas and they are collecting things jutsu related and because 9 tails is one of the strongest tailed beasts with most chakra it’s possible there after Naruto and someday Naruto will have to live always watching his back, that is his fate, so you look after Sasuke for now and teach him how to use the Sharigan, before the real Chunin Exam starts please leave Naruto to me.

Note: Chapter 99, 106, 125, 127-129 Flashback of Kakashi training Sasuke to use Chidori for upcoming tournament.

Note: Chapter 99-114, Tournament Final Exam.

Note: The Final Round the Tournament will Commence in 1 month from the Preliminary Round, stated by Hiruzen in Chapter 89, making the tournament will start on 6th of August.

Note: Chapter 114-129, 131-138, Operation Destroy Konoha/ Konoha Crush.

Note: Chapter 218 Flashback of Sasuke during Konoha attack when fighting Gaara, Sasuke is in front of Naruto saying he’s already lost everything once before, he doesn’t ever want to watch his precious comrades die in front of him, from Chapter 133.

Note: Chapter 139, Hirzuen Funeral and Itachi and Kisame appear in Leaf Village.

Note: The Final Round Lasted a Day on the same day the attack on the leaf happened by the sound and sand ninja, which Orochimaru fights Hiruzen for an hour stated in Chapter 136 and Hiruzen dies in Chapter 137, his funeral takes place 2 days after the battle/his death and Itachi appears with Kisame in Chapter 139, making Hiruzen's Funeral on the 8th of August.

Note: Chapter 130-143, Itachi and Kisame in Leaf Village, Naruto leaves Village with Jiraiya.

Note: Chapter 144-148, Naruto and Jiraiya left Leaf Village and are in Shukuba Town/ The Town Inn looking for Tsunade which they are pursued by Itachi and Kisame who are after Naruto.

Note: Naruto leaves with Jiraiya to find Tsunade in Chapter 149 and Naruto starts his Rasengan training in Chapter 150, 4 weeks of searching and Training, it took Naruto 5 days to complete 1st Stage in chapter 150 he trains until dark, In Chapter 151 next day Jiraiya give Naruto hint, Naruto says it’s been 3 days since hint it’s late so he goes back to inn and then completed the 1st Stage of learning Rotation on the Rasengan which he shows Jiraya in the Morning, which he Completed 1st stage and In Chapter 152 shows Jiraiya next day in morning, so he Completed 1st Stage in 5 Days.

Note: Chapter 405 Naruto Flashback leaving with Jiraiya to go search for Tsunade.

Note: Chapter 405 Naruto Flashback of Rasengan 1st stage water balloon training.

Note: Second Stage, In Chapter 152 Same day Naruto shows he completed 1st stage he starts the 2nd Stage which is about power and trains all night trying to bust the Rubber Ball, next day he continues his training Jiraya says he told Naruto 3 weeks ago not to be a baby, next day he continues training and Naruto tries to make a single blast to try to make it bust and instead of busting it he puts a hole in it, In Chapter 153 Same day Jiraiya gives him tip after putting hole in Rubber ball he says focus on a point, In Chapter 154 Same day Naruto still training and busts the rubber Balloon Completing the 2nd Stage.

So took him 2 days and 3 weeks to complete 2nd stage, In Chapter 155 Naruto wants to start 3rd stage but Jiraiya says there going to meet Tsunade first but he’ll explain the 3rd stage on the way in Chapter 154 Second Stage Complete.

Note: Chapter 155-157, Jiraiya explains 3rd stage and shows 3rd stage, Orochimaru finds Tsunade to strike a deal to heal his arms in return he offers her he will reanimate Dan and Nawaki, While Jiraiya and Naruto still searching for Tsunade.

Note: Chapter 157-159 Naruto and Jiraiya find Tsunade, Naruto and Tsunade make a wager.

Note: Chapter 160-162 Shizune tells Naruto about Tsunade’s past and Naruto leaves to go train, Naruto Rasengan Training 3rd Stage and goes unconscious from exhaustion day before wager and offer, Tsunade leaves to go meet Orochimaru.

Note: Chapter 163-171 Tsunade meets Orochimaru on day of his offer and Naruto’s wager and fights him, Naruto wins Wager using Rasengan on Kabuto and gives him the 1st hokage’s Neckalace, 3 way deadlock, Tsunade accepts Position as 5th Hokage and leaves to return to leaf.

Note: Naruto and Jiraiya find Tsuande late at night in bar in Chapter 157 and In Chapter 159 Naruto makes a wager in a week/ 7 days from now on Monday to master Rasengan, Same day Naruto says he’s going to go train and start the 3rd stage in Chapter 160, Said to be the 2nd night since the wager he made with Tsunade he said he’ll get it tomorrow and then it’s said the morning of the 3rd day continues with his training then on the 6th next Tsunade says tomorrow is the day and Jiraiya says Naruto’s hardly been at the inn this whole time and Naruto’s still training saying he’s running out of time and went unconscious, Jiraiya says tomorrow is the promised 7th day of the wager In Chapter 161, which in Chapter 167 Naruto Mastered Rasengan and Won Wager and In Chapter 168 she puts the 1st Hokage necklace on him while he's unconscious, so it took him 5 weeks to Master Rasnegan, Making it September.

In Chapter 171 Tsunade says they'll sleep in town and when Naruto wakes up they'll head to Konoha, which when Naruto wakes up he learns Tsunade becomes the 5th Hokage today and they return to Konoha which Shikamaru gets promoted to Rank of Chunin In Chapter 172.

Naruto and Jiraiya left about the 8th of August and don't find Tsunade until 4 weeks/ month after leaving village and meet her on Monday night at a bar about 8th of September and then made a wager with Naruto to master Rasnegan in a week and on Monday about the 15th of Sptermber Naruto mastered it.

The Databook says Shikamaru was still 12 when he got promoted to Chunin and his birthday is on 22nd of September.

Note: It’s Stated In Chapter 140, The 2 Elders Homura and Koharu Chief Counsellors of the Leaf, say to Jiraiya they need their 5th Hokage as soon as Possible, and so yesterday in an emergency meeting with the ruler of the Land of Fire, Jiraiya it was decided that it would be you, Jiraiya says sorry but no thanks he’s not suited for it, Homura says the decision has already been made, besides if he one of the Great Shinobi of Konoha Legend are not suited for it, then who is, Jiariya says if it’s one of the Great Shinobi you’re after still one other Tsunade, Koharu says she may be an appropriate candidate but we do not know her whereabouts at all, Jiraiya says he’ll track her down and bring her back would that be acceptable, Homura says all right we’ll put it under consideration immediately, Jiraiya says he won’t run and will get her himself and he will take one other with him on his travels, which is Naruto, he’d like to see what he can do.

Note: Chapter 157, Jiraiya tells Tsuande, The Village requests you to accept the title of 5th Hokage, In Chapter 158 Tsunade declines saying sorry No Thanks, In Chapter 169 Tsunade claims she’s Konoha’s 5th Hokage to Orochimaru, In Chapter 171 Tsunade says to Jiriaya from now on don’t call me Tsunade call me the 5th Hokage, then when Naruto wakes up she tells Naruto she’s the 5th Hokage and then they leave to return to Konoha, In Chapter 172 Tsunade returns to Konoha, Koharu says they must contact the feudal lord Immediately, the Appointment of a new Hokage merits a Celebration and tells Genma and Aoba to inform the rest of the Villagers of this.

Note: Tsunade becomes Hokage at 51.

Note: Chapter 172-181 Tsunade Returns to Leaf Village as 5th Hokage and to heal Kakashi, Sasuke and Rock Lee and Makes Shikamaru Chunin, Naruto vs Sasuke on top of Hospital rooftop, and Sasuke tied to tree by Kakashi to cool off, sound 4 arrive to leaf and approach Sasuke and ask him to come with them and Orochiamru will give him power, Sasuke leaves leaf village.

Note: Chapter 182-237 Sasuke Retrieval Mission, Sasuke Retrieval Mission Failed Kakashi finds Naruto and medical ninja find other team members and are placed in Hospital to be treated, Sakura asks Tsunade can she be her apprentice, Jiraiya announces to Naruto he’s offically his Student.

Note: Sasuke wakes up on the day when Tsuande came back to the village and Orochimaru sends sound 4 to Konoha, next day Naruto and Sasuke fight, same day sound ninja 4 are in Konoha, Kakashi ties Sasuke to tree all night and meets and fights the sound ninja 4 and they ask him to come with them, which that same night he decides to leaves with them and he knocks out Sakura and leaves the village, Sakura wakes up next day at 4am and Tsunade gets Shikamru and gives him his 1st mission to get sasuke which needs immediate action and odds are there will be trouble and most Jonin are away on missions so within the next half an hour gather as manay genin as he deems necessary and leave the village and there's one person she recommends him to include Naruto, so Shikamaru got Neji, Choji and Kiba as well the 5 of them became the Sasuke recovery team leave Konoha to get Sasuke before he crosses the border to the sound village and Rock Lee after surgery leaves village to help with Sasuke retrieval mission and Tsunade requested the sand for backup with mission which they sent the sand siblings and Naruto Catches up with Sasuke and they fight at final Valley, Kakashi is informed about Sasuke after he returns from a mission and wants to send him on another mission but he leaves to find Naruto and sasuke and sasuke beats naruto and leaves to go to orochimaru in sound village Kakashi finds Naruto unconscious at Valley of the end, Neji begin healed in operation by ninjas for 3 hours, Sakura wants to be Tsunade's apprentice and Jiraiya says Naruto is offically his apprentice and with 3 years he'll make him a full-fledge ninja.

Note: Chapter 328 Flashback of Asuma and his Team, Team 10 after Shikamaru get’s promoted to Chunin.

Note: Chapter 229, Naruto Gaiden Chapter 8 Naruto Flashback having Ramen with Iruka.

Note: Chapter 484 Sakura Flashback of Sasuke leaving the Leaf Village.

Note: Chapter 218 Flashback of Sasuke Recovery Team leaving the Leaf Village to rescue Sasuke.

Note: Chapter 352 Jugo Flashback of Kimimaro going to leave to Retrieve Sasuke for Orochimaru.

Note: Chapter 486, 695, Naruto Gaiden Chapter 8 Flashback of Naruto and Sasuke fighting at Final Valley when Sasuke leaves Village.

Note: Chapter 636 Kakashi Flashback of him, Naruto and Sakura saying Sasuke’s a Rouge Shinobi, standard operating procedure is to erase him and Naruto says he’ll bring back Sasuke for sure.

Note: Chapter 484 Flashback of Konoha 11.

Note: Boruto: School Trip Bloodwinds Records Novel 4, It’s Stated by Buntan that Naruto Killed her Father Raiga. Which happens when Naruto is 13 after Sasuke Retrieval Mission and before he leaves Village 3 Months after Sasuke Retrieval Mission.

Note: In Chapter 238, Tsunade says to progress this far in only 3 months of training this girl, she may be of a talent unseen since shizune, making it about 16th of December, Jiraiya says to Naruto they should get going and leave Konoha.

Note: Flashback of Naruto teaching Konohamaru Rasengan in Chapter 426, 428.

Year 62:

Note: Sakura, Choji, Ino, Hinata, Kiba and Shino became Chunin at 14 and Neji, Lee and Tenten became Chunin at 15.

Note: After all of team 10 became Chunin, Asuma gave the team a pair of earrings as a present for becoming Chunin, Flashback in Chapter 328 and 533.

Note: Chapter 533 Choji Flashback of becoming a full fledged Shinobi and swears upon his Clan’s oath as the 16th head of his Clan.

Year 63:

Year 64:

(Land of Sound)

Manda II,

Note: Manda II said to be 1 in 4th Databook Character detail when Kabuto attacks Land of Lightning Turtle Island in Chapter 513.

Note: Akatsuki Attack and Kidnap the 5th Kazekage and extracted 1 tails from him killing him at 16. Chiyo used Transmigration giving her life to bring back Gaara the 5th Kazekage back to life and she died at 73.

Note: Sha-No-Sho: Scroll of People: Kakashi’s Face Revealed!

Year 65: (4th Nina War Started and Ended)

(Land of Fire)

Mirai Sarutobi Autumn so Sep or Oct, Eida,

(Land of Water)

Kagura Karatachi,

Note: Mirai said to be 2 in Bland Period Shikamaru Hiden: A Cloud Drifting in Silent Darkness Novel Chapter 1 Section 1, when Shikamaru is 19.

Stated to be born in the depths of Autumn in Naruto the Last: Naruto the Movie Novel.

Mirai birthday in Sep or Oct in Chapter 533

Shikamaru has flashbacks during 1st day of 4th war on the 8th of Oct fighting Asuma and we see Kurenai holding her born Child Mirai, Asuma's king he's entrusted to Shikamaru.

Note: Eida is said to be 16 in Chapter 76.

Note: Kagura is said to be not much older than Boruto’s Class and is Mizukage’s right hand, by Anko in Boruto Novel 4 Page 55.

Character Sheet says he’s 168cm in Height making him 15 in Boruto Novel 4.

It’s said the systems Yagura established, the buildings he made, the laws he created, everything he loved, his subordinates, his bloodline, it all became a symbol of fear, so Kagura took the Name Karatachi instead of Tachibana which was his Grandfather Yagura’s last name, everything related to Yagura is taboo, the fear of Yagura was also the hatred of his heritage, said by Chojuro in Boruto Novel 4 Page 173.

It’s Stated in Boruto Novel 4 Page 74, By Mitsuki that Kagura became a Chunin in the Village of the Mist 2 Years ago.

Rank Chunin.

Note: Chapter 332 Shikamaru Flashback of him and Asuma playing Shogi from Chapter 316.

Note: Chapter 533 Shikamaru Flashback of Asuma dying and tells him who the king is in Shogi from Chapter 328.

Note: Chapter 584 Kabuto Flashback of experimenting on himself after Orochimaru died so he can be more like Orochimaru, which Orochimaru was killed by Sasuke in Chapter 345.

Note: Suigetsu flashback of Karin and Sasuke in Naruto Chapter 700+7/ Naruto Gaiden Chapter 7 from Naruto Chapter 348.

Note: Chapter 584 Kabuto Flashback of experimenting on himself after Orochimaru died so he can be more like Orochimaru, which Orochimaru was killed by Sasuke in Chapter 345.

Note: Shikaku has flashback of Shikamaru saying he went to lecture Naruto not to be all depressed, in Chapter 443 which was because of Jiraiya’s death and he says Naruto’s going to become a very important shinobi to the village and when he’s with Naruto he makes him want to walk with him at his side, in Chapter 443, 649.

Note: Chapter 581 Sasuke Flashback of Leaf shinobi talking about Itachi’s death and crossing him out there Bingo Book.

Note: Sasuke Jinraiden: The Day the Wolf Howled Prologue Sasuke reflects on the battle with Sasuke and his submission to Orochimaru.

Sasuke Jinraiden: The Day the Wolf Howled Chapter 1 Sasuke leaves Tobi after being told the truth about Itachi and the Uchiha massacre.

Sasuke Jinraiden: The Day the Wolf Howled Chapter 2 Sasuke arrives at Howling Wolf Village 13 days after leaving Tobi and isn’t searching for Itachi’s eye medicine and finds it’s a store called Rengyodo which it’s midnight when he arrives there which it’s closed so he waits at an abandoned Kodon Shrine and meets Reishi and Kina and has breakfast with them in the morning and Kina ask Sasuke help with solving the mysterious murders that have been happening and Sasuke agrees so long as he receives food as payment for his services.

Sasuke Jinraiden: The Day the Wolf Howled Chapter 3 Sasuke and Kina have stakeouts during the nights for 3 nights then Sasuke takes Kina home, in the morning Kina informs Sasuke that there have been more murders from other night and convinces Sasuke to detour to the murder scene before he goes and Sasuke starts to get intense pain in his eyes, what he believes to be a symptom of his awakening MS Knowing that the Mangekyo Sharingan awakens from the death of a loved one, and that Itachi died twenty-two days earlier and Sasuke returns with Kina to Rengyodo for some medicine.

Sasuke arrives to village day before he starts stakeouts on the 3rd night of the stakeouts it’s stated Itachi died 22 days ago.

Sasuke Jinraiden: The Day the Wolf Howled Chapter 4 Sasuke and Kina continue their stakeouts on the 6 day Sasuke assumes Reishi was responsible When Kina informs him of the murders the next day, Sasuke realises later that Kina is the murderer, Reishi explains that the Kodon clan sealed Roen into their shrine long ago, When his father broke that seal, he controlled it using his special saigenzai, but the control was broken during its attack on the village and Reishi's parents tried to seal it back into the shrine, but his mother was killed before they had the chance and his father wasn't able to do it alone and Doing what he could, he sealed Roen into the infant Kina at the cost of his life and it was only recently that Kina started to attack people, they tried a number of times to leave the village in order to get away from the anger, but have never been able to, possibly because their parents' seal still binds Roen to the shrine, Reishi wipes Kina's memory after each attack to protect him from the knowledge of what he's done, Reishi asks for Sasuke's help by transforming into Kina and killing him in front of everyone else so that they will believe Kina is innocent of wrongdoing, which Sasuke agrees to follow his request after seeing his determination reminding him of Itachi and the crowd starts attacking Reishi and Sasuke prepares to play his role, but Kina emerges from Rengyodo to defend his brother and As the villagers start turning their attacks on him as well, Roen is released.

Sasuke 6 day stakeout next day informed of Murders.

Sasuke Jinraiden: The Day the Wolf Howled Chapter 5 Sasuke realises that his Mangekyo Sharingan has finally awakened, giving him the feeling that Itachi is with him. Empowered, Reishi asks for Sasuke's help performing the seal his parents tried to use years earlier and if Sasuke distracts Roen with a genjonly a few seconds, he can seal it back into the Kodon Shrine. Reishi will die in the attempt, so he asks that Sasuke tell everyone, Kina included, that he was the killer. Sasuke agrees, impressed by Reishi's dedication to his younger brother.

With only a few seconds remaining, Reishi throws what's left of his perfume into Roen's face to immobilise it while they get into position. He casts a genjutsu with his Mangekyo Sharingan and time slows down. The genjutsu plane fills with crows and the masked boy from Sasuke's dream appears, explaining that the seal Reishi is about to perform will only last for seven years, after which Roen will escape. Sasuke is unconcerned so long as he can save Kina here, today, and asks what the boy wants with him. The boy also wants to protect them, and always has. From the boy's words, Sasuke realises he is Itachi, and cannot hold back his tears at this realisation. Itachi removes his mask and starts to deliver a message. Before he can finish, however, Reishi completes the sealing and the genjutsu breaks.

Sasuke Jinraiden: The Day the Wolf Howled Chapter 6 A celebration is held five days after Roen's defeat and Kina is hailed as a hero by the whole village, who believe he sealed Roen back into the Kodon Shrine in order to stop his murderous older brother. Or at least that's the story told by Jiryu Sendo and Kina has his doubts since he can't remember anything about what actually happened and He escorts Sasuke from the village as he leaves and asks him what happened, but Sasuke avoids giving an answer and he used his Mangekyo Sharingan to alter Jiryu’s memory, fulfilling Reishi's last request to not let anything happen to Kina and As Sasuke is about to set sail he asks Kina to come with him, warning him that Roen will return in seven years.

Sasuke Arrives to village day before his 1st stake out and on his 3rd night stakeout it’s stated Itachi died 22 days ago and he has 6 days of stakeouts and defeats Roen next day he leaves 5 days after the defeat of Roen, so he was only there for 13 days which means Itachi died 31 days ago.

Sasuke Jinraiden: The Day the Wolf Howled Epilogue Sasuke stands on a rock by a beach, reflecting on Tobi's words about Itachi. After sitting there for three days, he is joined by Jugo who informs him the others will join them shortly. He thinks about Itachi some more until Suigetsu, Karin, and Tobi arrive and Sasuke states that their team shall no longer be Hebi but Taka instead, and that their mission from here on out will be to destroy Konoha.

Note: Naruto the Last: Naruto the Movie Novel Chapter 2 Page 45, Page 47, Chapter 4 Page 140, Naruto in Memory Bubble Genjutsu and has a flashback of Pain attack when Hinata stands up to Pain to protect Naruto, when he was injured and unable to move being impaled by black rods.

Note: Chapter 528 Dauri Flashback of Ay 4th Raikage saying he has two right arms his own and him.

Note: Chapter 528 Dauri Flashback of Ay 4th Raikage making him, an Allied Forces Company Captain as his Right hand man.

Note: Chapter 515-583, 585-601, 607-620, 626-690, 4th Ninja War Started and ended.

Note: 4th Ninja War, Which started on 8th of October and ended on 10th of October.

Note: Chapter 515-543, 1st Day of 4th Ninja War 8th of October, Chapter 515 1st Day of 4th Ninja War, Chapter 543 1st Night of 4th Ninja War going onto next day with sun rising.

Note: Chapter 543-583, 585-601, 607-620, 626-690, 2nd Day of 4th Ninja War 9th of October, Chapter 543 2nd Day of 4th Ninja War, Chapter 691 2nd Night of 4th Ninja War going onto next day with sun rising which Minato tells Naruto Happy Birthday.

Note: Naruto The Last: Naruto Movie Novel Chapter 3 Page 81, Toneri says Eventually, Shinobi even Resurrected the 10 Tails.

Note: Chapter 671 2nd Night of 4th Ninja War 9th of October, The prophecy comes true, just as Gamamaru prophesied a blue eyed youth who can name all tailed beasts and frolic among them, the day the child of prophecy shall change this world has arrived and managed to summon Hagoromo’s soul.

Note: Chapter 678 Infinite Tsukuyomi dreams.

Note: Chapter 679-690, 4th Ninja War battle with Kaguya, which is the 2nd night of 4th Ninja War, 9th of October to 3rd Day of 4th Ninja War in the morning before Sun rise of 4th Ninja War 10th of October.

Note: Chapter 690-692, 4th Ninja war Concluded on Naruto’s Birthday 10th of October.

Note: Chapter 692-693, Sasuke’s Revolution.

Note: Chapter 693-699, Naruto vs Sasuke Final Valley, Chapter 693-698 Naruto and Sasuke fight on Naruto’s Birthday 10th of October, Chapter 698 Sun sets and rises making it next day 11th of October in Chapter 698-699, which Sasuke wakes up and admits he lost and finally gets Sense knocked into him and Sakura heals both Naruto and Sasuke after fight and everyone in Infinite Tsukuyomi Dreams wake up and are released from the Genjutsu and tailed beasts get free from Catastrophic Planetary Construction.

Note: Chapter 699, Sometime after Naruto and Sasuke fight ended and freeing everyone from Infinite Tsukuyomi Dreams on 11th of October, the Leaf Village have a Funeral for the one’s they lost during the 4th Ninja War, which Naruto still has Injuries from Sasuke fight but it seems they have healed at bit.

Note: Kakashi Hiden Novel Prologue Page 17, States Kahyo’s Son Hakuhyo was stung by a giant hornet and brought to Hospital, but there was no Doctor there. Nor at the next Hospital, or the one after that, not a Doctor to be found in the Land. When some shady witch Doctor was finally tracked down, a man who could hardly be called a Doctor, the Boy was in Shock and on the Verge of dying. Naturally, the spells and all the rest were of no use at all. If that poor lad had gotten treatment right away, perhaps they could have saved him. But every last Doctor had Disappeared from the Land of Waves. Why do you think that is, Because they had all been bought by the 5 Great Countries to attend to wounded Ninja troops during the 4th Great Ninja War.

Note: Kakashi Hiden Novel Chapter 10 Page 120, Kahyo states her Son Hakuhyo inherited her Kekkei Genkai. One Day, When he was Playing with a friend, likley just fooling around, threw a rock at a Giant hornet’s nest. the Furious hornets attacked them. Hakuhyo’s only thought was to save his friend, and he unleashed Jutsu after Jutsu, things he couldn’t have been taught by anyone. He tried desperately to protect his friend. Hakuhyu produced the Ice Swords through the method written into his blood and protected his friend from the hornets. No matter how much he himself was stung, he tried to dispatch the hornets that came after his friend . Thanks to him, the friend managed to get through it with only a few stings. But Hakuhyo was stung all over. and what do you think happened after that. That friend abandoned Hakuuyo and ran off home by himself. When it grew dark and Hakuuhyo still hadn’t returned home, I went to this child’s house in search of him. And they looked at me with eyes wide like they were seeing a monster. Now that they knew Hakuhyo was the Child of a Rouge Ninja, they wouldn’t let him play with their child. The mother told me as much to my face. Even still, I managed to ask where the children had been Playing. The sun had set and the Moon was high by the time I found Hakuhyo. He, her Son had collapsed, alone in the woods. His entire body was swollen. His face so much so that he was almost unrecognisable.

Year 66: (Kakashi becomes Hokage)

Note: Kakashi Hatake becomes Hokage.

Note: Kakashi Hiden Novel Prologue Page 11, States it’s September a Year after the 4th Ninja War.

Note: Kakashi Hiden: Lightning in the Ice Sky Prologue, Chapter 1-14, Epilogue, takes place nearly a year after war and is before sasuke leaves Konoha.

Note: Sasuke leaves the Leaf Village to know the Shinobi world and how the world looks with the current him and it’s a journey of atonement too, Sasuke leaves the village and Naruto gives sasuke his headband back outside the village, in Chapter 699.

Year 67:

Note: Shikamaru Hiden: A Cloud Drifting in Silent Darkness Chapter 1-4, Takes place 2 years after the Great Ninja War, Shikamaru spends his days racing around, hands full as one of Konoha's key protectors. Then, large numbers of ninja from every region are reported missing. Even Sai disappears and the place where the missing shinobi end up is the mysterious empire, the Land of Silence. Shikamaru is sent with Ro and Hinoko/ Soku on an Anbu mission to find Sai.

Note: Naruto The last: Naruto the Movie Novel: Naruto The last: Naruto the Movie, 2 years after the Fourth Shinobi World War, Naruto must stop Toneri Otsutsuki, a descendant of Hamura Otsutsuki, after Toneri causes the moon to descend toward Earth. Which takes place in the depth of Autumn, stated in page 16 of Naruto the last: Naruto the Movie Novel, Which Autumn in Japan is September to November.

Note: Naruto The Last: Naruto the Movie Novel Chapter 3 Page 85, Toneri, a Descendant of the Branch Family, is Misusing Hamura’s Tensigan to try to Drop the Moon onto Earth. Hamura’s Tensigan must be Destroyed. Byakugan Princess, the Only one Who can do this is You. All at Once, the Soldiers bent down and Knelt. A tall Old Man walked in. Horns Extended from his long Blonde Hair. Hinata Thought he was the Sage of 6 Paths, Hagoromo Otsutsuki, But that was not the Case, My Name is Otsutsuki Hamura, Byakugan Princess, You must not allow the World that my Elder Brother created come to an End.

Note: Naruto The Last: Naruto the Movie Novel Page 16, States 2 Years has passed since 4th Ninja War, and in the depth of Autumn outside the Hidden Leaf Village, accompanied by 2 Subordinates, Hiashi Hyuga was waiting for a certain man.

It’s stated to be the Depth of Autumn, Which September to November is Autumn, the Depths of Autumn refers to October to November.

Chapter 1 Page 17, Naruto invited by Iruka to visit Academy and instruct the children as a special lecture for a day.

Chapter 1 Page 18, States Next month the Rinne Festival, would be grandiosely held in the Hidden Leaf Village, Originally it had been a solemn Festival for offering prayers to souls of the deceased, but in recent times, that meaning had faded, it turned into an anticipated event where close friends would hold gatherings and exchange presents. Among the crowd of people in the shopping disrict was Hinata. She came out of a store with a slight blush on her cheeks, and a happy expression. Against her chest, she held the paper bag with red yarn sticking out of it as she made her way through the crowd. Ino, Shikamaru, and Choji were visiting Kurenai’s House. They had brought birthday presents for Miari, the child that their deceased teacher Asuma Sarutobi had left behind, which she turns 2 years old.

It’s Stated that the Rinne Festival is next Month and that it’s Miari’s Birthday which she is 2 Years old, Which she’s Born before 4th Ninja War Started, which takes place 2 Years ago on 8th of October.

Chapter 1 Page 19, In the evening, Naruto was eating Ramen at Ichiraku, he was sitting in line full of seats at the counter with academy kids slurping hot Ramen, today is my treat, eat as much as you want. Konohmaru Finds Naruto at Ichiraku and needs to talk to him about something important, he said that there was something he wanted to give him, Naruto headed towards the Sarutobi Residence at Konohamaru’s invitation, an old shed stood in a corner of the huge plot of land that was Sarutobi Residence, they open heavy door, and Konohamru pulled out an old wooden box, placed it in front Naruto, Konohmaru says it’s something Granpa Hiruzen left Behind, it showed up while he was cleaning.

Chapter 1 Page 20, Konohamaru opened the lid of the box, and inside were, books, letters, and other personal items packed tightly, Konohamaru says most is junk but one thing in here that will be special to you, look at this, Konohamaru held out a paper bag. Hinata secluded herself in her room, knitting a red scarf, putting her whole heart into it, when she grew tried she glazed at an old tattered children’s scarf, it was the same one that Naruto had worn around his neck on the day they met and ever since that day she admired him, as she grew up those feelings became stronger. She looked at her Calendar and saw that there was 1 month until the Rinne Festival, Hinata resumed her work on scarf. Several days later, Naruto was walking through the shopping district in the afternoon, accompanied by Konohamaru. He was carrying two extravagantly wrapped presents in his hands. His fangirls had given them to him-one in front of the bath house, and one on an uphill road in a residential area. The Rinne Festival’s not even here yet, If they start now and keep giving them at this pace, What’ll happen, In contrast to Naruto’s disturbance, Konohamaru was in a good mood due to his respected big brother figure’s popularity. Female voices says Naruto have a happy Rinne Festival.

It’s stated Rinne Festiavl is in 1 month when Hinata looks at calender working on Naruto’s scarf and its stated Several days later after Naruto went with Konohamaru to go to Sarutobi Rescidence to get something that will be special to him and also of Hinata working on a scarf for Naruto.

Chapter 1 Page 21, Several girls held out presents with flashy wrapping screaming Naruto, for the Rinne Festival, Naruto felt completely puzzled as he accepted a massive number of presents. After Naruto and others had left, Sakura walked from an alleyway with shopping bags in her hands, Hinata came out holding a bag of red yarn, the yarn she had purchased a few days ago had ran out, and she came back to buy more. Sakura asked Hinata if she’s knitting something and Hinata replies says a Scarf and Sakura sees the Rinne festival banner in shopping district, and instantly does the math in her head Hinata + Rinne Festival + Hand knit scarf = a present for Naruto. Sakura says go for it, you’re giving the present to him right, Hinata turned red all the way up to her ears. Naruto returns home carrying presents, without turning on the lights, he tossed the presents onto the bed and flopped down next to them, he glazed aimlessly through the dimness at the mountain of presents, they weren’t just on the bed, as he looked around, there wasn’t even a place in the small room to set foot around the mass presents.

It’s Stated Hinata purchased red yarn a few days ago and came back to buy more.

Chapter 1 page 23, Naruto’s nose began to stir and he looked out the window to see that a light snow had begun to flutter about, Naruto says snow that’s why it’s getting cold, Naruto turned on his bedside lamp, and took a scarf out of a drawer. It was a carefully knit scarf with a subdued border pattern. Naruto pressed the scarf to his face, checking the feel of the wool, and wrapped it around his neck. Snow continued falling at the Hyuuga residence as well. Snow covered the entire surface outside, piling up on the tree and lanterns in the garden. The snow had stopped in early evening, the clouds had cleared, and a crescent moon was floating in the night sky. Next to a foggy window in a room warmed by a heater, Hinata continued to knit a scarf. It’s done, Hinata held the long scarf that she had completed over her head, and was greatly please. Having put all of her feelings into relentlessly knitting, the scarf had ended up becoming quite long. Hinata leaves her room, and wonders if she will really get through to Naruto, saying it’s late and can’t decide to give him the scarf tonight or tomorrow, Hanabi in the Garden says to Hinata are yo going to confess already.

It’s Stated Snow started to Flutter and Continued to Fall, with Hinata finishing Naruto’s Scarf, Which Snow typically starts falling in Japan in December.

Chapter 1 Page 24, Hanabi and Hinata, talk and Hinata says Turning ninja tools into toys again, you’ll be scolded when father returns, then Hanabi says speaking of father he hasn’t contacted us, has he. There were times when their father, Hiashi, would be absent on missions for long periods, but even in those cases, there was some form of communication. The mission might have needed to be kept classified this time. Hinata stomach growled and Hanabi says did you spent all your time knitting not eating dinner, and teased her that her stomach will growl when she will confess, Hinata says she not going to confess, during her last stride over the past few days, Hinata hadn’t put anything in her stomach aside from some dried candies, Then Hinata left the house to avoid embarrassment.

Chapter 1 page 25, Kakashi has a Kage meeting about the moon falling and it’s evident it’s drawn near to Earth.

Chapter 1 page 26, Naruto and others eating Ranen at Ichiraku, There were 5 people, Ino, Sakura, Nauto, Choji, and Shikamaru. Lined up at the counter, they were slurping delicious ramen. Hinata appeared in front of Ichiraku, warmly clothed and holding a gift bag. Sakura gave Hinata her seat, the 2 fangirls appeared.

Chapter 1 page 27, Naruto’s 2 fangirls ask him did you like his presents from before and offers them something to eat at Ichiraku his treat as his thanks for the presents. The 2 fangirls wanted to eat with Naruto and dragged him away, clinging to his chest, Hinata stood from her seat and walked away, Sakura tells Naruto to walk Hinata home, Naruto asked why and then Sakura instead chased after Hinata to walk her home, Sakura says to hinata she was going to give Naruto the scarf, Hinata nodded. From above, three large shadows came flying. They were strange birds far larger than humans. With the wings and beaks of eagles, and thick legs and claws like those of lions, they were eagle beasts. Several shinobi dived from the backs of the eagle beasts that were gliding through the night sky. They landed soundlessly in the garden of the Hyuga Residence. They were creepy shinobi whose limbs and faces were covered with bandages. Without hesitating, they invaded the inside of the building, and silently ran up the stairs. The bandaged shinobi opened the sliding screens in succession, proceeding further and further inside. When the final screen opened, there stood Hanabi, ready with her kunai. From the bottom of the kunai, there hung a strap with a doll. The next moment, Hanabi let out a small scream and lost consciousness, then fell over into the arms of the enemy.

Chapter 1 page 29, strange spectre flew into Sai’s field of vision, the gang of shinobi’s riding eagle beasts flying low altitude above the snow, their faces covered by bandages, and one of them carrying Hanabi unconscious.

It’s Stated when Hinata started Knitting Naruto’s scarf when she looked at Calendar that it was 1 Month to Rinne Festival, Which then later at some point Snow starts to fall when Hinata’s Finished Naruto’s Scarf, Which Snow Fall in December in Jappan, Which it seemed when Hinata took at Calendar that was how long she had to finish scarf and give to Naruto, Which in Sakura Hiden Chapter 1 Section 1 Page 23, Stated It was Winter when Toneri the Final living Moon Otsutsuki descendant Kidnapped Hinata’s little sister Hanabi and took her Byakugan and Plotted to destroy the world.

Chapter 1 page 30, Hinata out side of Naruto house practicing what to say and to do for when he returns home to give him the present. As she inhaled to practice one more time Naruto shows up, and sees he already has a scarf, Hinata had chosen red wool to look good with Naruto’s blonde hair, but this scarf with grey and white lines looked much more refined. Hinata says that’s a nice scarf and Naruto says you think so it was knit just for me, it’s warm and he smiled, Hinata then says goodnight to Naruto then bowed and walked off.

Chapter 1 page 31, Hinata alone at the park, swaying on a swing, as she thought about who gave him the scarf, then Toneri appears and says he has came for her. Hianata took up wanted to leave then was surrounded by 2 men.

Chapter 1 page 32, Naruto looking for Hinata, she seemed odd somehow tonight, in front of the park, Naruto thought he heard a girl scream and stopped walking, when he looked a tall man was restraining Hinata, several enemies appeared and attacked Naruto, left his clones to the wall fry enemies and chased after Hinata and Toneri.

Chapter 1 page 37, Naruto saves Hinata from Toneri, the next morning on outskirts of Konoha, a giant crater had opened up in the middle of a field, Rock Lee and Tenten who had come to investigate were peering into the crater.

It’s stated next day after Hanabi’s kidnapping.

Chapter 1 page 38, Kakashi says your mission is to rescue the kidnapped Hanabi, you will be a 4 man cell with Shikamaru as commander also Hinata will join you as per her wish, Kakashi commanded Naruto’s and the others in their group of 5 who stood before his desk in the Hokage’s office, the 5 were Shikamaru, Sai, Naruto, Hinata and Sakura. Izumo, Kotetsu and the astronomer stood in waiting behind Kakashi. Kakashi tells Shikamaru to hold out his hand and the astronomer formed a seal, a small disc with Characters etched into it apperaes on Shikamaru’s Palm, Kakashi says a top secret clock only the 5 Kage’s posses.

Chapter 1 page 39, the clock is the time limit how long earth could endure the approach of the moon it was a watch to indicate the time until then, Kakashi said the one moving the moon could be Toneri who kidnapped Hanabi and he says his gut is telling him this, their main mission is to rescue Hanabi, however depending on how it unfolds you may end up carrying out 2 missions at the same time, if the opportunity arises while rescuing Hanabi, what he means is if you can save the world save it.

Chapter 2 page 59, Night time arrived in the underground space, the artificial sun was releasing a cold light, similar to the moon, it served as the role of the sun during the day and the moon at night, they didn’t know if this was a machine or some kind of energy source. But it was quite an ingenious device. Shikamaru’s team ate their dinner around an open fire in their campsite in the forest. Sai said it’s quite even though meteorites might be raining down on the surface right now. Shikamaru looked at the clock in his palm, the time of the destruction of humanity was certainly approaching. Don’t panic, Tsunade yelled from atop a hill.
The road below her was overflowing with the people of the Fire Country carrying their household belongings. This bomb shelter was built to house every citizen of the Fire Country, Proceed in an orderly fashion! Don’t quarrel, After the previous Shinobi World War, Tsunade, the 5th Hokage, had passed the position of Hokage on to Kakashi Hatake. For the safety of the entirety of the Fire Country, she was currently commanding everyone as the one in charge of guiding the evacuation, and as the leader in healing the injured. A meteorite It’s huge, The crowd screamed, and began to rampage. They rushed to the entrance of the bomb shelter. Dragging a deep red trail, a giant meteorite plunged down from the sky. It was heading towards the village of Konohagakure. No matter what Tsunade yelled, she couldn’t stop the panic. Rock lee opens 5th gate and Standing up to the crisis in the village of Konohagakure was Rock Lee. He stuck out his fist, and leapt at the meteorite, prepared to give his life. He steadily rose, and approached the meteorite.

Chapter 2 page 60, Even if it costs my life, I will protect the village, Gradually, his whole body flared crimson, and his eyes widened, revealing the whites. It was approaching. The giant meteorite was before his eyes. Uryaaaa, Just like that he plunged into the meteorite and broke through. The meteorite cracked, rumbled, and finally exploded and scattered in all directions. Magnificent, Might Guy was sitting in a wheelchair, watching over Lee’s efforts from the window of a hospital room. Without even trying to wipe away his tears of excitement, he gave a thumbs-up, congratulating the heroic act of his favourite student. On his cast were the two characters meaning youth. His white teeth sparkled. Next morning, the members of team Shikamaru’s team were soaring above the forest, riding individually on 4 ink birds, Naruto and Hinata rode on the same bird, Naruto controlling the bird while Hinata focused on observing with her Byakugan, and sees a village 20 kilometres ahead.

It’s stated to be next day after given Rescue and save the world mission, which Hanabi got Kidnapped 2 days ago.

Chapter 2 page 61, There was a town, it may have been a very beautiful town long ago, cave residents made by carefully digging into the rock extended from the base of the mountain to the summit, overgrowing with Ivy and weeds, there was no sign that people lived there, it was a town that seemed to have been abandoned for Hundreds of years, rusted ninja tools scattered about, it looks like this was a Shinobi village long ago Sai said. In the afternoon once it had been confirmed that it was more or less safe, it was decided that they would split up into 2 teams, one with Naruto and Hinata and the other team with Shikamaru and the others, to gather information, at the place they arrived at the town, black burn marks could be seen, there was a fire, maybe there was a war, in an abandoned house, multitude of human bones were piled up to the ceiling.

Chapter 2 page 62, the sense of happiness he experienced in the hours of that afternoon, it was like a sweet and sour, light-headed overjoyed feeling that Naruto had never known until now. It wasn’t like the sense of accomplishment after finishing a mission, having friendly conversations with his comrades, or the instant that he slurped up the broth of Ichiraku’s ramen. It was a special happiness. Naruto and Hinata took a break. Sai says it seems Shikamaru had found an old building that had been converted into a shrine on the outskirts of the town, and wanted to examine it with Byakugan. The team set foot inside the shrine. The enshrined statues were cracked at the front, and the walls and pillars were beginning to crumble. The entire place was ornamented with an eye design drawn with a characteristic pattern on the pupil area. It was a pattern of light extending in eight directions from a circle in the centre, like two crossed shuriken overlapping. A verse of poetry was engraved in ancient shinobi characters on a stone monument nearby. It’s an ancient oath. In the case that the path of mankind is in error, Shikamaru began to read the verse aloud.

Chapter 2 page 64, the eye of reincarnation (Tensei) will be resurrected and the moons fist shall destroy man kind. The group descended to the lower level, carrying lanterns. In the lower level was a wide room with several thousand stone boxes neatly arranged in rows. Could these be coffins, is this a cemetery, Shikamaru asked, Could these be coffins, is this a cemetery, Shikamaru asked in a serious voice. Someone’s here, Hearing Hinata’s voice, Shikamaru turned his lantern, shining it on an old man. The old man’s eyes were closed. His form was shabby, but there was a quality about his appearance that made it feel like he had been someone in a position of responsibility in the past. The Byakugan, I sense the byakugan. The old man turned to Hinata and held out his hand. Yes, there’s no mistake, Byakugan Princess.

Chapter 2 Page 65, The old man slowly opened his eyes, he had no eyeballs. He sat down on the floor, and spat up something from his mouth. It was a glowing bubble. The bubble immediately expanded, making its light stronger. Hinata’s Byakugan reacted to the bubble’s light. Passing through the Byakugan, images were projected into Hinata’s mind. A great number of soldiers began a war. A battle flag with a crescent moon and sun was being waved. In the centre of their position, a giant orb was being prepared like a weapon. The next moment, the orb emitted a strong light, and she couldn’t see anything. The next thing she saw was the sight of countless people having collapsed. The heaps of corpses, this was certainly a depiction of Hell.
It was there that the images were cut off, and Hinata lost consciousness. Naruto hurried to catch Hinata as she fell over. Bastard, What did you do to Hinata, The old man whom he asked got up. The Tenseigan has been revived, At that time, the old man’s head fell from his neck. His hands and feet also crumbled as if they had lost their strength. The severed head rolled onto the floor, and the mouth narrowly moved. You must stop, the Otsutsuki’s, The old man completely stopped moving. The group came out of the underground cemetery and returned to the middle of town. Shikamaru and Sai were on the balcony of a particular building discussing what had just happened. That man was saying Otsutsuki, but isn’t Otsutsuki the former surname of Hagoromo the Sage of 6 Paths Shikamaru recalled.

Chapter 2 page 66, that night they decided to stay in abandoned building that seemed useable, while everyone was settling down to go to sleep, Naruto who was on lookout duty stopped in the hallway in front of Hinata’s room, light from a lantern was shining out the room, when he peeked inside Hinata was knitting, Hinata sensed someone and turned her head, and their eyes met she looked down she normally smiled at Naruto.

Chapter 2 page 68, Naruto returned to his room after Hinata wanted to be left alone. Toneri can see with Hanabi’s eyes, Toneri’s fate as a member of the Otsutsuki clan was to have his eyeballs taken from him at birth, he could perceive his surroundings by gathering chakra in his mind’s eye, and was able to act more quickly and precisely than he could by seeing with eyes. However, there was definitely a big difference between sensing and seeing. It was on this day that Toneri first knew the joy and excitement of seeing things.

Chapter 2 page 70, Naruto and the others left the abandoned cave dwellings and headed towards the next town in search for new information, the day grew dark during their traveling, so it was decided they would make camp on the woods, the artificial sun was coldly glowing, like the moon. Naruto who was dozing near the campfire abruptly, woke up and Hinata was gone, Naruto quietly crawled out his sleeping bag, Hinata was mending the red scarf by a spring, Naruto watched the over her form the shadows of the trees, he worked so well with Hinata until the previous afternoon, but now she is acting distant. Naruto says he’ll save Hanabi and Hinata says he’s kind, Naruto says he’s not just being kind because he loves her but he really is worried about Hanabi.

It’s stated pervious afternoon Hinata and Naruto worked well but now she’s acting distant, which means Hanabi got Kidnapped 3 days ago.

Chapter 2 page 71, Hinata is shocked and her eyes widened and peered at Naruto, and asked him what he just said, he said he’s worried about hanabi, she said before that, his stomach tightened, what he ought to say as a man, he ought to say it properly, he looked into her eyes, her pure while pupils were wavering, he took a breath and all at once he said Hinata I love you, as hinata stared at Naruto joy came from eyes just for a moment then it quickly Changed to deep sadness she looked down without saying anything, then Toneri appears floating above them, and says he’s come for Hinata, Hinata pushed the red scarf against Naruto chest to give to him.

Chapter 2 page 73, Hinata says goodbye to Naruto, and goes with Toneri, Naruto clutched the red scarf and couldn’t comprehend what was happening, and chased after them, Naruto asked why she would go with him, over and over in his head full of confusion, noticing Naruto screaming, Shikamaru, Sai and Sakura caused after Toneri on ink birds, Naruto riding on a bird, forming a Rasnegan says to Toneri give Hinata back, Toneri says she came to him of her own free will, and that it has been fated since ancient times Hinata and him will be married, Naruto says that’s a lie right, Hinata and shouts say something.

Chapter 2 page 75, Naruto had first noticed Hinata’s feelings when they had fallen into genjutsu. He had known since long ago that Hinata had said she loved him. However, Naruto had confused Hinata’s love with the kind of love as in I love ramen or I love shogi. He must have caused her so much pain. Perhaps now he was receiving his punishment for the long years of being dense-that was how Naruto felt.

Chapter 2 page 77, could that be Earth, Sai said, riding on a bird and looked down at the planet through the hole.

Chapter 3 page 82, Hinata acted along with Naruto and the others even after finding out the reason for Hanabi’s kidnapping, and the reason why Toneri had launched an attack against Earth, she understood the words and the images that the old man had shown her in the underground cemetery in the ruined temple, Hinata trouble there had to have been another way if she told Naruto and Shikamaru and cooperate with them, but Hinata had kept quiet for her comrades and chose to take action on her own, to protect the village and Naruto, this mission might be far beyond her own ability but she had no choice but to carry it out, otherwise rejecting Naruto’s confession, hurting him and infiltrating Toneri’s castle would be meaningless. Hanabi was sleeping before her eyes, good morning said Toneri standing behind Hinata.

Chapter 3 page 84, Toneri grabbed his eyes and began to anguish saying don’t worry it’s sign that the Byakugan is maturing into the Tenseigan it should stop if I rest a bit. In the underground cemetery at the temple, the old man without eyeballs stepped out of the darkness and released a glowing sphere from his mouth. Hinata’s Byakugan reacted to that light. Various images revolved around and jumped into her head. An army, the design of two crossing shuriken, a giant eyeball, an explosion, a mountain of corpses, Hinata found herself alone in the temple’s underground cemetery surrounded by thousands of stone coffins. The figures of people rose above the coffins. The number of figures gradually increased until there was one standing on every one of the coffins. They were all armor-clad soldiers. Hinata took a breath. We are the descendants of Hamura, the main family of the Otsutsuki clan. We were annihilated by the branch family, who misinterpreted Hamura’s celestial decree. The man who began to speak was in his prime, but looking closely at his face revealed that he was the old man that had released the glowing sphere earlier.

Chapter 3 Page 85, Toneri, a descendant of the branch family, is misusing Hamura’s Tenseigan to try to drop the moon onto Earth. Hamura’s Tenseigan must be destroyed. Byakugan Princess, the only one who can do this, is you. All at once, the soldiers bent down and knelt. A tall old man walked in. Horns extended from his long blond hair. Hinata thought he was the Sage of 6 Paths, Hagoromo Otsutsuk, but that was not the case. My name is Hamura Otsutsuki, Byakugan Princess, You must not allow the world that my elder brother created to come to an end. Hanabi sleeping making sounds as if she was having nightmares, Hinata stopped knitting and grabbed her hand, and said I swear I’ll bring you home, remembering Hamura Otsustuki’s words that he said only Hinata was the only one who could destroy the Tenseigan, she says I’ll swear I’ll find and destroy Hamura’s Tenseigan, while tightly grasping Hanabi’s hand. Shikamaru’s team who Hinata abandoned, concealed themselves in a hiding place made inside a cave, Naruto consciousness had not returned after losing a great mass of chakra form the effects of Toneri’s glowing sphere, Sakura putting all of her Medical Ninjustu into saving Naruto, Naruto was in a critical state, and he incoherently muttered out Hinata’s name and nothing else.

Chapter 3 page 86, while Sakura is healing Naruto, Sai and Shikamaru look through a hole and see earth, we’re on the moon it’s actually the moon and not what they had originally thought which they had thought they had just gone underground. The cave that descended underground had somehow connected to the moon. Furthermore, this moon, it was filled with a giant open space, and had an artificial sun floating in the centre of it. It was an abnormal celestial body. There was a strange darkness where the bubbles were floating. That may have been the passage linking Earth to the moon. Judging by the ruins in the abandoned buildings and shrine, there was no mistaking that an advanced civilization and a shinobi clan possessing vast chakra had lived on the moon in the past. Perhaps they may have been the ones who created the passageway connecting Earth and the moon. Also, it might have been the descendants of that clan from the moon who kidnapped Hanabi. There was no way that this was unrelated to the moon falling to Earth.

Chapter 3 page 89, Hinata asked Toneri what the island is Toneri says so it has already appeared, this Hamura’s shrine and it gets closer to the castle once a year around this time. After finishing her meal Hinata goes to the balcony and glazes at the single floating island, it was to far to see through to the inside with the Byakugan, but Hinata thought that Hamura’s Tenseigan might be hidden inside this floating island.

It’s Stated in Naruto the Last: Naruto the Movie at 1:04:52, Hinata says an Island and Toneri says so it has appeared again that is the Temple of Hamura once a Year during the Rebirth Festival it comes near the Castle.

Chapter 3 page 90, Shikamaru goes to check on Naruto’s condition, Sakura continuing to treat him, who was lying in a comatose state by the campfire, Sakura pours her chakra into Naruto’s body, and she must be at the point of exhaustion, and Shikamaru says to Sakura how about taking a break, she continues to treat Naruto, Shikamaru lightly tapped her shoulders and the she collapsed by the fire, Shikamaru checked the cloak in the palm of his hand, the time was steadily advancing.

Chapter 3 page 91, Hinata finally found her target, Naruto opened his eyes screaming Hinata, they had been hiding out in the cave for 3 days, and Naruto says where’s Hinata, Shikamaru said she’s in the artificial Sun.

It’s Stated they have been in Cave for 3 days, which means Hanabi got Kidnapped 6 days ago.

Chapter 3 page 93, Naruto says he confessed to Hinata, Sai said confessed, and looked at Shikamaru, Naruto says it means to convey romantic feelings, to other person, Sai says oh that confession, I know that word, Naruto then says and then she rejected me. Shikamaru said without thinking not the opposite, and was stunned to actually hear Naruto had been rejected. The awkward yet genuine Hinata had been in love with Naruto, and the did witted Naruto hadn’t realised it in the slightest throughout the years, surrounding friends had continued to worry about such vexing love situation, now it had come to this, at a time when the world could end tomorrow, Naruto had been the one to confess and Hianta had refused it. Naruto says he was completely rejected. The guy had confessed to the girl and gotten rejected this was unexpected outcome from Naruto and Hinata’s circumstances, but this was a private conversation, finally having cooled down, Shikamaru decided that he should end this talk, the mission was their major responsibility the life of a young girl, and the future of the world were at stake , the discussion of romance could wait until after. Shikamaru looked at the clock on his hand and said well the mission, the mission, let’s go bring back Hanabi and Hinata.

Chapter 3 page 94, Toneri could feel to design being born on his eyes the perfect Tenseigan, Hinata running down corridor while the pain in Toneri’s eyes had began, he couldn’t come out his room for while, now was her chance to search for the Tenseigan and destroy it if she could, She had figured out that the location of the Tenseigan was directly below the castle. The small celestial body floating within the crescent moon-shaped rock base, it was only there that the Byakugan didn’t work. Her field of vision was distorted and she couldn’t inside. It was just like how she hadn’t been able to see that Toneri’s base was inside the artificial sun. There was no mistaking that the Tenseigan was hidden within the barrier blocking the Byakugan. When Hinata left the castle, she jumped from the edge of the rock base to the small celestial body. From the outside, it appeared to be a simple cluster of rock, but it had an entrance, and there were levels inside made by humans. Hinata continued down a corridor that seemed to lead to the centre. A large eyeball, 20 meters in diameter, floated in the wide open space in the centre.

Chapter 3 page 95, Hinata finds Hamura Tenseigan and she fought Toneri’s puppets, saying You’re in the wrong, Hamura’s soul entrusted me with his true decree at the tomb of the Otsutsuk’s main family, whom your ancestors destroyed. You are twisting Hamura’s teachings, Hamura does not wish for the destruction of the Sage of 6 Paths world.

Chapter 3 page 100, Artificial sun was giving off a light like moonlight.

Chapter 4 page 105, Hiashi Hyuga was wandering alone in the wilderness. He was deeply wounded, having fought the puppet shinobi and narrowly escaped death. He had to let Konoha know of the existence of a terrifying plan, Hiashi was walking with only that in mind. A man was standing before him, blocking his path. The man was looking in his direction. Drawing his kunai, Hiashi went on his guard. He gathered his little remaining chakra and used his Byakugan. He recognized the man’s face. It was a Konoha shinobi. All at once, his strength left him, and Hiashi collapsed in that spot. Dyeing the sky red, a meteorite passed overhead. The man’s face was illuminated, it was Sasuke Uchiha.

Chapter 4 page 105, next morning four ink birds rose from their camp carrying Shikamaru and the others. Sakura, who had used up her chakra healing Naruto, was not yet at full health, but she was recovering.

It’s stated next morning day after Naruto spent 3 days in Cave, Which means Hanabi was Kidnapped 7 days/ a week ago.

Chapter 4 page 111, Suicide Corps lead by Rock Lee using 6th gate to destroy meteor.

Chapter 4 page 117, Hinata tells Naruto about Hamura’s Tenseigan and to destroy.

Chapter 4 page 120, Hinata and Naruto destroys Hamura’s Tenseigan together and saw tens of thousands of eyeballs scatter they were all Byakugan’s.

Chapter 4 page 125, Toneri uses his Tensigan to end Earth and awakened / manifested the Tenseigan, Kakashi recalled the words that Hiashi had murmured from his bed at the first aid center. The moon, Please don’t let the moon be destroyed, What are you saying Kakashi says, Hiashi says Most likely Hanabi and Hinata are on the moon, On the verge of death, Hiashi had said only that before losing consciousness. Kakashi is then told Kurama is spotted in the moon, and is fighting a giant stone statue on the moon. Kakashi says what Hiashi said is true.

Chapter 4 page 128, Moon cut in half.

Chapter 4 page 132, Hamura’s Tenseigan had been made from collecting generations of the Otsutsuki clan’s Byakugan. That was why Toneri’s clan had no eyeballs. When Naruto and Hinata had destroyed it, the Tenseigan had reverted back into tens of thousands of Byakugan, and scattered over the moon’s surface. Those countless scattered Byakugan were now beginning to shake. The Byakugan floated up, and flew towards one point. Towards Toneri, One by one, the Byakugan stuck to Toneri’s body. The handsome Toneri was changing into a grotesque monster.

Cheaper 4 page 134, Kakashi looks through telescope and sees Kurama’s back on all fours writing Shinobi characters on moon’s surface, both missions complete.

Chapter 4 page 136, Kakashi says the world is saved.

Chapter 4 page 136, While on the verge of death, his father had worried about the future of his young son being left all by himself on the moon. The puppets were there, so his livelihood was of no concern, but humans need more than just food, clothing, and shelter. When I die, go to Earth. You can forget about the Otsutsuki clan’s cause, and the decree. Look for comrades, find friends, live for your own sake. Humans mustn’t live alone, However, Toneri had remained on the moon. Being isolated was difficult, but when he thought about his ancestors’ wishes, he didn’t feel like leaving the moon.

Chapter 4 page 137, says he won’t go to Earth and instead will remain on the moon and will atone for his sins, and the moon won’t fall to earth anymore never again.

Chapter 4 page 139, Hinata asks Naruto, who gave him his scarf,, Naruto stated his Mother Knitted the Scarf for him, and that Hiruzen, Naruto’s Guardian had Received it from Kushina, while she was alive and had it stored in a box, which Konohamaru, Hiruzen’s Grandson had recently discovered it and gave it to Naruto. Hanabi’s eyes returned thanks to Sakura.

Chapter 4 page 142, On the outskirts of the village of Konoha, there was a snowy scenery over the woodlands. With a tremor, the field of snow exploded, and Naruto flew from the smoke, holding Hinata. They rose higher, higher, higher, higher into the night sky. In the air after the 2 completed their ascent, just as they were about to start free falling, everything was still. Naruto-kun, Hinata, thank you, With a giant full moon in the background, Naruto’s shadow moved its face closer to Hinata’s shadow, and finally overlapped.

So Hanabi was Kidnapped 7 days ago/ week ago, which Kidanpping was during Winter/ Rinne Festival/ Rebirth Festival and after both Missions of Rescuing her and saving world were complete, and this Team sent on both Missions Returned to Earth on the Outskirts of Konoha from the Underground Cave that let to the Moon.

Year 68:

Note: Retsu-No-Sho: Naruto Special Extra Chapter: After the Last Movie, Naruto and Hinata go on a Date.

Note: Sakura Hiden: Thoughts of love Riding Upon a Spring Breeze Prologue, Chapter 1-8, I'll see you soon." With those words, Sasuke left. Time has passed since Toneri Otsutsuki's attack, and spring has come once more. Sakura continues to develop her medical ninjutsu, her days busy but peaceful. But as she supports her friends through their own love lives, she can't help but wonder...how long must she wait? Then, he returns. But dark shadows follow him, and Sakura must face a new trial, as both the leading Medic Ninja of her time...and as a woman.

Stated in Title it takes Place in spring, also states in Chapter 1 Section 1 Page 22, that it’s Spring.

Note: Konoha Hiden: The Perfect Day for a Wedding Prologue, Chapter 1-8, Epilogue, Naruto’s and Hinata’s Wedding.

Note: Rai-No-Sho: Scroll of Lightning: The Beast that was Shot by Love, It is set during the events of the Blank Period after the events of The Last: Naruto Movie. The omake is unique as it is through Akamaru's point of view on his thoughts on master/partner Kiba Inuzuka.

Note: Gaara Hiden: A sandstorm Mirage Chapter 1-5, is set a few months after the Naruto’s and Hinata’s wedding. Gaara has just turned twenty years old, so Sunagakure's elders think it's time for him get married. They have already found a wife for him, which he is going to meet shortly and so, Gaara's toughest battle yet begins...

Note: Akatsuki Hiden: Evil Flowering Full Bloom Prologue and Epilogue, Nearly Three years after the end of the Fourth Shinobi World War, Sasuke Uchiha travels through a forest. Despite having once been an international criminal, he was granted freedom and a new outlook because of the friendship of Naruto Uzumaki, the love of Sakura Haruno, and the trust of Kakashi Hatake.

Note: Sasuke Shinden: Book of Sunrise Prologue, Chapter 1-4, Epilogue, Nearly Three years after the Fourth Shinobi World War. As part of his redemption, Sasuke is still travelling around and protecting Konoha from afar. In his journey, Sasuke still tackles missions sent by Kakashi while dealing with his own personal problems.

Year 69:

(Land of Fire)

Boruto Uzumaki 27th of March, Sarada Uchiha 31st of March, Mitsuki 25th July, Inojin Yamanaka

5th of Dec, Shikadai Nara 23rd of Sep, Chocho Akimichi 8th of Aug, Metal Lee, Denki Kaminarimon, Houki Taketori, Renga Kokubou, Hako Kuroi, Sumire Kakei 12th of June, Wasabi Izuno, Namida Suzumeno, Doshu Goetsu, Tsuru Itoi, Enko Onikuma,

Note: Boruto is said to be Born a year after Naruto got Married at 19 when he was 19 Wedding is between Nov-Dec and Boruto was Born in March so he likely was conceived in June when Naruto was 19 then he turned 20 a month after in Oct, Boruto was Born in March when Naruto was 20 but was going to Become 21 that year in Oct.

Boruto said to be 5 in Naruto Last Epilogue in

Sketch.

Said in Chapter 80 by Eida, are you really 12 years old, to Boruto.

Boruto Datacard / Ninja Encyclopaedia Entry 1 in Boruto Chapter 1.

Boruto’s Birthday Column From Naruto Official Site.

Was in a Team with Mitsuki and Sarada in Team

3/ Team 7/ Team Konohamaru.

Rank Genin.

Note: Sarada said to be 11 in Naruto: The Seventh Hokage and the Scarlet Spring/ Naruto Chapter

700+1 which is 15 years after the 4th Ninja War.

In Naruto Gaiden: The Road Illuminated by the Full Moon/ Boruto Chapter 0 also known as Chapter 3.5, in Boruto-Fans No. 1 Introducing Boruto’s Friends it’s stated Sarada’s Birthday is on 31st of March, in V Jump Special Edition Boruto Database it’s stated Sarada’s Birthday is on 29th of March, which Naruto official Account on Twitter/ X that Run the Naruto official website posted a Public apology on Twitter/ X saying in V Jump Special Edition Boruto Database there was an Error with Sarada’s Birthday and that the 29th of March is incorrect and the 31st of March is correct.

In Boruto Chapter 40, she Awakened 3 Tomoe Sharigan.

In Boruto Chapter 80, she Awakened MS.

Sarada Datacard / Ninja Encyclopaedia Entry 2 in Boruto Chapter 2.

Sarada’s Birthday Column From Naruto Official Site.

Was in a Team with Boruto and Mitsuki in Team

3/ Team 7/ Team Konohamaru.

Rank Genin.

Note: Inojin

In Naruto Gaiden: The Road Illuminated by the Full Moon/ Boruto Chapter 0 also known as Chapter 3.5, in Boru-Fans No. 1 Introducing Boruto’s Friends it’s stated Inojin’s Birthday is on 5th of December.

Inojin Datacard / Ninja Encyclopaedia Entry 5 in Boruto Chapter 5.

Was in a Team with Shikadai and Chocho in Team 10 / Team Moegi.

Rank Genin.

Note: Shikadai

Shikamaru Hiden Novel Chapter 4 states Everyone kept living their lives, and time passed slowly and steadily, like a stream and then Shikadai was born, the Son of Shikamaru and Temari.

In Naruto Gaiden: The Road Illuminated by the Full Moon/ Boruto Chapter 0 also known as Chapter 3.5, in Boru-Fans No. 1 Introducing Boruto’s Friends it’s stated Shikadai’s Birthday is on 23 of September.

Shikadai Datacard / Ninja Encyclopaedia Entry 4 in Boruto Chapter 4.

Was in a Team with Inojin and Chocho in Team 10 / Team Moegi.

Note: Chocho

In Naruto Gaiden: The Road Illuminated by the Full Moon/ Boruto Chapter 0 also known as Chapter 3.5, in Boru-Fans No. 1 Introducing Boruto’s Friends it’s stated Chocho’s Birthday is on 8th of August.

Chocho Datacard / Ninja Encyclopaedia Entry 6 in Boruto Chapter 6.

Was in Team with Inojin and Shikadai in Team 10 / Team Moegi.

Rank Genin.

Note: Boruto Chapter 75 Naruto says Amado Mentioned his Daughter dying 12 Years ago, Boruto says 12 Years ago, that's Around When he was Born, Amado has Flashback of Akebi, his Daughter and says his Daughter Akebi Suffered From a Terrible Disease, it was an Unknown Cause, no Drug or Cure was Effective, it was a Fatal illness that Doctors had Given Up on, But he didn't Rail against them, because he'd already Discovered a way to Resolve the Situation, he's make a New Body Via Cloning, he didn't care about Ethics anymore, it seemed Logical to give her a totally New Shell, Rather than Fix up a Defective Product, After all this was a Field that he'd ling Tinkered in, The Bar was Significantly Easier than Developing New Meds, Akebi died a Short Time Later, yet he wasn't Sad, at Least no at that Point, He Plugged Away, in a Race Against Time, he Preserved Akebi’s Brain, and Succeeded in Extracting, Digitising, and Creating a Backup of her Memories.

Note: Boruto Chapter 75 Eida says Amado’s Daughter’s Name is Akebi Sanzu and she died at 24.

Note: Shikamaru Hiden Novel Chapter 4 Page 161, states Everyone kept living their lives, and time passed slowly and steadily, like a stream and then Shikadai was born, the Son of Shikamaru and Temari.

Year 70:

Boruto Chapter 75 Amado has Flashback of Delta the Clone of his Daughter Abeki and says about 9 Months after his Daughter Abeki’s Death, She was Abruptly Completed, She had Akebi’s Voice and her Exact Appearance, Plus Her Memories, but she was a Total Stranger, She Definitely Retained Akebi’s Memories in Full, yet she wasn't Akebi, it wasn't just her Personality, her Humanity, it's Difficult to Explain but, it seems a Human's Consciousness is more, than just an Aggregation of Memories, he Kept Remaking her but, Each Time she was someone other than Akebi, even if he could Create a New Person, it just was not Possible to Reproduce one who'd Existed Before, he Realised that this was the Domain of Gods, a World that Humans were not Meant to Step into, and it Finally, Hit Him, that his Daughter, No Longer Existed.

Boruto Chapter 75 When it Finally Hit Amado, that his Daughter, No Longer Existed, That's When he met Jigen, he Appeared to him and he said he'd Reunite Amado with his Daughter Akebi, if he Assisted Him, When Jigen / Isshiki's Objective were Achieved he'd Reward Amado by Reviving his Daughter, that was the deal, he Aligned with Kara as a Last Hope, not Knowing, that his Goal, The Chakra Fruit, Would Come at the Cost of this Planet's Life, he was Prepared to do Anything for his Daughter but, What's the Point if there's no Planet to Live On, but he hasn't given up on his Daughter at all, Jigen never Specified how he was Planning to Revive his Daughter, it's even Possible he may not have ever intended to do so, but as he worked towards taking him Down, he Discerned, The Mechanism of Karmic Resurrection, it's what Isshiki was trying to do through Vessels, and he attempted to Reproduce Akebi using a Clone, was almost Identical, his failed Efforts at Reproducing Personality, which crossed into the Domain of Gods, was Possible only with the Miracle of Godly Power, The Shiniutsu Karma, he Added Akebis Data to Kawakis Reconstructed karma, all Kawaki has to do is Implant Karma into a New Cloned Body that he'll Prepare, that should be Enough to Revive Akebi.

[if-you-fan-a-fire]

"INSISTS ON JAIL TERM FOR REGISTERING BETS," Toronto Star. June 16, 1934. Page 3. ---- Magistrate Jones Disregards Recommendation of the Crown Attorney --- Found guilty of recording registering bets, Leslie G. Lawrence was fined $200 and costs and sentenced to a month's imprisonment by Magistrate Jones in men's police court to-day.

When police officials testified Lawrence was only a clerk and not pay-off man, the crown attorney recommended against the jail term. but Magistrate Jones refused to alter his verdict. Lawrence was arrested during a raid yesterday on a Riverdale establishment. A telephone, racing form and recorded bets amounting to $40 were found.

Pleading guilty, the accused remained silent during the trial.

"Two hundred dollars and costs. or three months, and one month." said the magistrate. "I'll pay," replied Lawrence, putting his hand in his pocket.

"But you have also got to serve 30 days," explained a police officer.

"What?" demanded Lawrence, putting his hand up to his face.

'The crime is just recording," protested Crown Attorney Malone.

"Can't I do, both?" asked the magistrate.

"I wouldn't recommend it to your worship." Magistrate Jones left the bench, returning a few minutes later with the observation that the maximum penalty was $1,000 and one year.

"Under those circumstances I see no reason for altering my verdict," he said.

Was Slashed With Razor Patrick Kelly, found guilty of wounding, was sentenced to from three to six months in jail. According to Bert Kopley, who exhibited a badly lacerated hand, Kelly set upon him with a straight-edge razor, which he had sold to him.

"He paid me 40 cents and still owed 35," Kopley testified. He then took me down and he had some beer." asked Mr. Malone.

"Was he drunk?" "Yes, he was loaded."

Kopley said that the accused returned to his house later on in the night, and demanded an order of food.

"I told him it was too late. With that he slashed me with the razor. I put my arm up and took the blow across the back of my hand."

Kelly declared he could not remember anything about the affray as he had been drinking.

"Where did you get the money for the liquor?" asked the magistrate. "I just got a job."

"And used your first week's pay to wound somebody. Well, I'll put you away for from three to six months."

A charge of automobile theft against Wilbert Shorting was withdrawn.

Fraud Charge Stands. Edgar A. Hird, charged with fraud. and Steve Kucheryk, with theft, arraigned on a count, were remanded to June 22.

This was amateurs' day in early court when but one of the eight "drunks" to stand up against the rail was fined.

"Please, your honor, I've been working on the highway and I just came to town for a bit of a do." pleaded William Hope, charged with intoxication.

"When were you here last?" asked Magistrate Tinker. "Seven months ago."

"Is that right? I wouldn't have thought it. However, I'll give you another chance."

"Where do you work?" the crown asked Russell O'Neil. also facing a drunk charge. "In a broom factory."

"In a broom factory?" laughed the cadi. "Why don't you stick to it?"

"I think I will." rejoined O'Neil, who was remanded for sentence.

Fred Westlake was assessed $10 or ten days for intoxication.

Leonard "Dusty" Rhodes preferred to travel on the railroad. Police officers said he was found sitting on top of the most expensive car load of merchandise on the train.

"Dusty," answering a vagrancy charge, said it was dark and he couldn't see what he was on.

"It may be a coincidence," replied the officer, "but we've had six robberies on that train alone lately."

"I was looking for an open box car," protested Rhodes. "And the car before this was empty with the door open." retorted the officer.

"Ten dollars or ten days," the cadi decided.

Lack of Knowledge "Your honor. I don't know nothing about it." declared Fred Falconer to Magistrate Coatsworth in magistrate's court No. 2 this morning, when asked to plead on charge of "having." Fred was nervously stroking a long gray-black beard. P.C. Craig told the court he had seen the accused staggering along Shuter St. yesterday afternoon, and that he was "pretty well gone."

"I had a few drinks but I don't know where I got the bottle," said accused, when the officer produced a bottle of wine which he said he had found in accused's pocket. "If he found it in my pocket, I'm guilty of it - but I don't know nothing."

Falconer had no permit, and threw himself on the mercy of the court. "Ten dollars and costs or 30 days, with the liquor confiscated," ruled the judge.

Both Permits Cancelled "We'd been to the race track and made some money and were having a little party," said Robert Belyea, charged with "having" liquor in his apartment without a permit. P.C. Hawton told the court he and P.C. Kerr had entered the apartment on the night of May 26, and found seven men drinking beer. A case of beer was found in the kitchen, and neither Belyea nor his wife had purchased the beer on their permits. Belyea's permit showed purchases of $155 since Feb. 9th and his wife's more than $100. He is a part-time worker and makes only a small weekly wage, the officer said, adding that Belyea had told him he "had 'phoned for the beer."

Pleading guilty, Belyea was sentenced $100 and costs or three months, both his and his wife's permits were cancelled, and the liquor was confiscated.

[mythicaldemigoddess-of-deltarune]

Valentino & Vox (From Hazbin Hotel) Almost Had A June Wedding...in a Weird Dream I Had...

[Note: Only Mature Audience Readers can read this, and No Little Kids that are under 16 or 18...this is just in case, also reading this post that talks about my weird dream about Valentino and Vox, is optional. also please DO NOT ignore the whole my placing "do NOT reblog this without permission", and I even try to make sure to gives a heads up, and well...I'm just saying this, cause of something that I notice a few days ago with one of my posts...also will talk about some off topic stuff, like how Toxic-Religious people are, and will talk about past lives stuff and that whole Satanic Ritual Abuse thing that some Toxic-Satanists do, and well hopefully not anymore....but I'm not gonna use those tags for this post, maybe in the next post I will but this is still gonna be about the whole Valentino and Vox almost having a June Wedding. and once again reading this post is optional, even if it gets off topic and you don't have to read this post if you don't want to.]

okay weirdest dream ever, and it happens on June 1, 2024...

well I was awake before when it became June 1...

but I did end up going to bed, and yeah did have some weird dreams.

but the whole Valentino and Vox dream might be the weirdest, even if they seem to oddly enjoy my company for some odd reason, or like tolerated it...I don't know.

but anyway besides the whole getting weird with the vows that I don't fully remember them, only maybe bits and pieces...

like asking I think one of the parts when asking Vox, if he would worship Valentino's feet...

that is weird, and does Vox have a thing for feet...?

is that why he is so obsessive with his Rival, Alastor...?

Vox, your a married man now...you can't do that anymore. XD

anyway when it did get to Valentino, can't remember much about it...

it had something to do with him loving Vox, and even as they turned into golden dust that went to the After-Afterlife...

anyway at first I said those two should get married,

and then I end up asking Vox first,

"Vox, do you take Valentino to be your Babe."

and when it got to Valentino's turn, I asked

"Valie, do you take Vox to be your Boo."

and yeah as weird as it is, I called Valentino "Valie" instead of just Val or by his full name Valentino...

it could either be Valie spelled "Valie" or "Valy"...

but it sounds pretty much like Valley too, I think.

anyway it might before I could tell them to kiss each other and before I could say you know the lines that make it official...

that I woke up...and I felt a bit sleepy still when I woke up, so I may have had to blink the sleep out of my eyes some...well it might of been more like I had just woke up so of course it will be like that, maybe sometimes...

but if the dream did finish properly, I could of said:

"I now pronounce Husband & Overlord, you may kiss your Overlord-Husband..." or something like that.

I must of been being very weird with my dreams...

this close, those two almost had a June Wedding in that weird dream.

and if I do have some kind of Priestess Blood, I wonder if that would make their getting married in that dream official...? lol XD

I was working on well, still technically working on a type of Crossover Fan Fic idea that involves Adam from Hazbin Hotel, that was inspired by two other stories, but with some differences in the plans for the Crossover idea that has to do with Adam...

anyway when I'm able to, I will post it over at Quotev...

but anyway apparently Helluva Boss's new episode came out on May 31, 2024...

I'm not gonna say what happens in it, other than Cletus, Keenie and Collin appear in it...and well, Collin was just being too adorable for words and some "bad words" he says, is just too freaking adorable...well to me it was adorable.

also a certain scene that has to do with Collin, might not help with the whole shippers, well I do find the ship interesting, but bet anyone who does ship them, will be going crazy fangirl/fanboy/fanenbying over it, and I'm not saying what it is right now...

it's gonna be a fangirl screaming time for the hardcore shippers that ship Collin with that one...the name I dare not speak for at least now...

cause I want to wait a bit more before talking fully about it.

but anyway while working on the type of Crossover story idea, which is kind of like a Crossover AU idea, that has to do with Adam...

I suddenly got this curious feeling or thought, about checking to see if the new episode of Helluva Boss was up now, and to my surprise it was, and it had been since hours ago, and well it had already became June 1 I think...but anyway, I think it was May 31, 2024 when it came out.

I did love the episode, even with some of the sad parts.

Collin, you are a Precious Gift of The Goddess, NEVER change. O_O

yeah, and if some do have a Toxic-Problem with me believing in both the Heavenly-Father/God & Earthly-Mother/Goddess, they can go kiss Mammon's butt for all I care...you know, if it were possible for them to do that...to the Helluva Boss version of Mammon.

but seriously, they can go kiss his butt for all I care.

so excuse me for escaping The Masculine Indoctrination thing...

I mean, at least not everyone who only believes in The Heavenly-Father and Jesus, are all Toxic-Religious, so that's one of the good points.

plus it means they haven't been corrupted by the Toxic-Masculine energy that sneaks in there...

I mean, even if a Church and people in it, can still be good, there be a mix of some people in there that take it way too far and do things that could either physically or emotionally hurt others that might believe different.

either maybe believing in both the Heavenly-Father and Earthly-Mother like myself, or them not really having a belief at all and they could be Atheist, but you shouldn't try to force convert, that is sick and wrong to do that to anyone, no matter if they are religious, spiritual or not.

you do NOT force someone or a lot of other people, into a religion your in, and scaring them to stay in it when they try to leave, and saying they will end up going to Hell if they try to leave, is the most disgusting and wrong thing.

I know I had brought up that before, that someone in my family when they joined some religious group before, they had to fake being crazy I think just to get kicked out of it, probably because the whole thing that has to do with being told if they tried to leave, then they will end up going to Hell....

and let's not forget them falsely accusing one of my other family members, they just assumed and they were probably a bunch of self-righteous toxic-religious jerks, and hopefully not everyone who is part of the same thing they are, well hopefully they aren't all bad...

it can really suck when some Toxic-Religious people do take things way too far, and yeah they probably make some other people who are part of the same religion as them, unhappy with how they crossing lines they shouldn't and doing more harm than good.

also, still gonna add Toxic-Satanists to that list, also it might be a really good thing not to have full memories of your past life and only get bits and pieces come into your mind, but not full pictures.

it could be because of the damage done to the soul, the trauma it went through from dying more than once before it got to mature and develop in the mortal plane of this reality...

like being possibly aborted in one of those late abortions, also in another life being used in a freaking ritual that would be possibly satanic ritual abuse.

and I know my closes past life, was when I may have died in a hospital when I was about, maybe around 4 years old.

it may have traumatized me when I may have remembered it when I was around that age, but then at some point forgot about it and the memory ended up becoming a idea for a Creepypasta OC and then later after figuring out I was remembering something from a past life, I decided to reuse the idea that was inspired by some past life memory, into a Hazbin Hotel OC...

I did post the drawing over at Deviantart of course, and maybe sometime I can try to post them on here when I'm able to.

I know that one of the impressions I got from the possible past life trauma, that it may have made me think if I wore a dress, I might end up the same way I did before...which I don't think I have a full memory from it.

I believe the birthmark I have is from that time, so it might be from that.

it could be possible that there might be other people who didn't really get to reach past the ages they had died, and kept having bad luck for a while until they ended up being reborn into a more safe but not fully perfect but can be okay and perfect in their own way type of family...

from the accident I had in my present life, it was lucky my Mom got me to that emergency room place on time.

I know I did say before that Fizzarolli's scar had reminded me of my own, it is kind of in a different place and not at the brow part...

but it is still at where the right eye is, well is like not on the eye of course...it is like on a place and well, I was really little when it happen.

plus even a fan fic I read before reminds me about it, even if the story has a different scene from what happen.

but for all I know, if I was by myself during that time and no one came to check on me, it could be possible I wouldn't be here, I mean...maybe...?

guess I never really thought about that, that I could of died that time.

I might of been around 2 years old when it happen...

well there is that possibility that I would of died if I didn't get help on time, maybe the reason why I was kept safe from that happening, is because my Mom has those "Mom senses" like the time before that accident happen, and I had my first seizure, well was about to...

of course one of the fan fics I like reminds me of that as well, but that is besides the point...

before it did happen, my Mom had a sense that something was wrong, and when she did come back, I had my first seizure when I was maybe it was when I was 1 year old or before I turned 1 year old...

I forgot, I will need to ask sometime...but I know I was still a baby when it happen.

and even if my family might not take my theory and belief seriously,

I still think my seizures may have been caused by both the energies of people and the places we would be in.

not all Epilepsy, and I still need to talk about the whole Empath-Epilepsy thing that I had been meaning to talk about in a new post, but I had been putting it off.

maybe for all I know, before my rebirth into this life, my new Mom had to be chosen, and one of the ways to make sure I didn't die too soon, was to have me be reborn to a Mom who has RH Negative Blood.

I really need to get around to checking to see if my blood type will come out "O RH D Negative" for a third time, I keep putting it off, but not really on purpose...guess we never found a good time to do that blood type test thing again, that you can do at home to see what blood type you are.

but anyway, it could be possible that even in my past lives I may have always had the same blood type, but had some bad luck...

and for all I know, my Moms in my past lives may not of had the same blood type as me at least until now.

I know my Mom is O RH Negative, but I'm not sure about the "D" part...we aren't really sure.

maybe one of the reasons I keep putting the whole checking to see if it will come out the same for the third time, may have to do with how it ended up making me feel the few times we tried...

but I did learn that not only it is best to use the left hand when doing that blood type test, but also to close my eyes...

I know I had to either sit or lay down after the last few times and be close to some cool air afterwards, but I think I will be okay so long as I stick to the plan.

also it could be possible that if you hadn't reborn yet in the human world, you could grow-up in some part of the afterlife...

your soul might mature and grow both mentally and physically but it will stop at a certain point, but when you are taken to go through the reincarnation again, the soul might age backwards like before they send you to your new family, they use something to turn your soul back into the way they made you...

I mean that is a theory, plus it would make sense if that were the case.

we know that in Hazbin Hotel and Helluva Boss, Sinners go to Hell and Winners go to Heaven...

well if some fan theory is true, it is only half of the Winners that end up going to Hell, and the other half that is Sinners end up going to Heaven, because of the broken corrupted system that Sera is running.

I still don't think I can fully hate her, like she still reminds me of White Diamond from Steven Universe.

like if Charlie was Steven and Emily & Vaggie were Connie,

they were in some Crossover AU in the Fanon Timeline.

Charlie, Emily and Vaggie are around Steven and Connie's age.

and Sera is telling Charlie that "she's not a demon, you are Lilith..."

and Sera could tell Charlie that she is "acting like a child"

and 14 year old Charlie from that Crossover AU of a Timeline,

would of course say "I am a child. whats your excuse...?"

the famous line that Steven says to White Diamond. XD

yeah, I'm still gonna stick to my theory that Lilith The Fallen Angel and Lilith that is Adam's Ex-Wife, had their stories mixed together and possibly had them being mistaken for being one in the same.

so in that Crossover AU idea, where Charlie is "Steven" in there and Sera is like "White Diamond", Charlie's Mom would be a Angel and a Seraphim.

but she fell in love with the Earth, and changed her form into a Human and ended up with Adam for a while, before meeting and falling in love with Charlie's Dad...

how that Fanon Timeline version of Charlie's Mom became human, could of been from Incarnation, and she may have had Charlie when she was still in her human body...

but anyway, in theory it could be possible that only half of the "Sinners" that end up in the Hell in Hazbin Hotel and Helluva Boss, don't belong there, just as some of the "Winners" don't belong in Heaven...

also besides Fizzarolli reminding me of that scar I got when I was really little, Pink-Pearl from Steven Universe also reminds me of it.

Pink-Pearl (aka Volleyball, but I'm just gonna call her Vollie) probably tried to deny for a very long time, after being from White Diamond's control, that Pink Diamond did hurt her.

I mean, yes she knew that Pink hurt her, but she kept making excuses for her...

that "she didn't mean to." and "she was just too close to Pink during that time."

even if Pearl didn't want to believe it at first, but then she did start to believe Vollie after seeing her reaction and how they ended up bonding a bit more before they fused.

both Vollie and Spinel were badly hurt by Pink, that was before she became Rose and got a bit better...

well I like to think the Pink that became Rose and became Steven's Mom, is actually a double that the Original Pink Diamond made to act as her double while she went off to a far off galaxy away from White, Yellow and Blue...and it was that Original Pink that had hurt Pink-Pearl and Spinel, and not the one that would become Rose.

even if Charlie and Lucifer still love Lilith, they can't make excuses for her...

like Charlie doesn't even know and she thinks her Mom has just been off doing something really important for the past 7 years.

my Dad was probably gone way longer than that probably, and he never was there for the time it was time for my Mom to have me, and he could of came at any freaking point for it, but he wasn't.

he could of came and see me and still went back to his real family, like he could of visited me when I was a 1 year old, then 3 and then 5 and it's okay that he skip a few years, but I realized he could of came to see me at any other of those early times, and not just that one time when I finally met him...and yeah, even if there was some kind of bond formed, maybe it was just me being happy to finally have my dad...but, was he truly my dad...?

I mean yeah biologically yes, but he wasn't really there for me.

sure there is that whole thing where the other parent gives money to the other that is for their shared offspring, but that's besides the point.

I guess myself and anyone else would have mixed feelings about one of their parents, either it be a Mom or Dad.

but Charlie, Octavia and Loona are so lucky to have their Dads...

Lucifer, Stolas and Blitzo might not be 100% perfect and all three of them might be going through some emotional issues and they might be going through some form of depressions at times...

but at least they are trying, plus Charlie could be misunderstanding her Dad, and her "First B**th Woman" of a Mom probably lied to her about Lucifer not wanting to see her and that he only calls when he wants something...

still gonna call Charlie's Mom by that nickname...

also even if Stolas and Blitzo might misunderstand each other,

Stolas isn't exactly off the hook for what happen over at Ozzie's.

I mean, he tried to hide his face behind a Menu when Fizz and Ozzie were doing that whole song.

of course Blitzo will be upset, Stolas!

you made him think you were ashamed and embarrass to be seen in public at Ozzie's place!

if I was able to, I would punch Stolas so hard in the arm for not letting that finally sink in.

any fan who was watching the same episode, could figure that out.

well some might not figure it right away unless they re-watch it.

I mean it took me a while to figure out Tucker from Red Vs Blue, was a Cute Idiot because of the whole him believing he went back in time.

I had to re-watch the season and episode when it first started, to let it finally hit me that Tucker was a Cute Idiot...and yes, I'm still very aware about the you know what...which still not happy about, but we can still keep the Fandom alive and do the type of "in memory" stuff and well hopefully things do work out, and the new parent companies remember that the shows are for Mature Audiences Only, so long as they remember that, everything should be fine, I mean I can only hope so.

at least they wouldn't be calling Hazbin Hotel a "Kids Cartoon" like some Toxic-Religious man did in a video that one time...

seriously, it is NOT for kids, I mean did that guy even read the info about it, and how it is for 18 and up or whatever...?

I can't remember if his last name was Knowles or not...

I didn't bother watching all his video, but I know he peeved me off.

he probably peeved off a lot of others with calling the show a "Kids Cartoon", I mean NOT all cartoons or shows or movies or even books, are gonna be for kids, some are for older teens and adults.

even some parents have some sense to know this, even if half of them don't bother to watch their kids properly and end up scapegoating the Mature Content instead of taking the proper responsibility.

oh and let's not forget the half that let's their kids or the kids they are looking after that aren't their own, that they let see a a mature content thing, that they aren't the right age for.

and yeah, that had happen to me before when one of my older cousins let me watch a movie that I was too young at the time to watch, but I don't remember much during that time, and I did misremember and thought it was my Mom that let me watch it, we had rented it from some old video store place.

but anyway, turns out it wasn't my Mom that let me watch that movie, it was one of my older cousins who should of known better.

I do still like the movie, and now have it on DVD.

but I had learned that what happen when I was little, was wrong and my older cousin should of told me no, and I wasn't old enough yet.

well, one of my family probably covered my eyes in some parts of the movie, so that is good...

but seriously, parents or guardians or even grandparents, as well as cousins and siblings who are old enough to know better.

shouldn't just say "yes" or "okay" when it came to what happen, and they can't just keep scapegoating their irresponsibility to the Mature Content that is NOT aimed or for much younger viewers.

yeah some slight mature references that is in a show for all ages, will have that joke that will go over some kids heads and only those older will get...

like one of the episodes of the Powerpuff Girls, when the girls tried to join that all Super Hero Boys Club...

it wasn't just the Reboot that had Mature stuff, and one of their mistakes was that too twerking thing...

but I don't think that show was all bad, but it still made some mistakes...but what show doesn't, and maybe someday they could try again and bring a new Powerpuff Girls back in the future.

I liked Bliss, sorry, but I do...

plus maybe some could relate to the whole "not being able to fully control their powers thing"...

I'm still gonna use my gem bracelets for the multi-purposes I have them before, that is both protecting me from certain energies...

and the whole making sure that the thing that the pendulum had unlocked doesn't become too powerful that it gets like Cassie White or even Alessa Gillespie...or like fully like Alastor.

lucky the whole freaky thing with the modern Radio only happens once in a while and yeah my spirit animal or like I could call my spirit familiar is a deer...I think it is suppose to be a stag.

I know I do like sweets, but even I have my moments when I want something else besides sweets...but yeah I did get curious maybe a year or so ago about the whole Pineapple Pizza and surprisingly I liked it.

I also found out I like both meat and pineapple on pizza, and also dipping it in ranch dressing.

yeah, I'm that weird to dip a pineapple pizza (no matter if it has meat with it or not) into some ranch dressing...

it's been a while since I had some pineapple pizza, it might of been before that Covid-19 mess happen when I first tried it.

maybe I will try to put strawberries on my slice of pizza to see how I like it, not sure if I will eat it with ranch dressing though...

that should be for the pineapple and meat, also when its just cheese pizza.

but anyway, that dream I had about Valentino and Vox was pretty weird...I think I almost came so close into marrying them.

I mean not becoming their bride, well if those two were real and they did hypothetically marry me, guess that would make them go from just Overlords to "Princes"...

I mean yeah even if I don't have that official title, but if someone not just me who is descendant of a few royal families, and not just King Solomon, which once again not gonna view being his Granddaughter as a curse, because the best thing ever happen is that my line can't take that throne, no matter if there is a loophole there or not.

but yeah, if you are a descendant of some royal families, you are technically a Prince, Princess and Prinx...

Prinx is suppose to be the Nonbinary term for some Royals who are Nonbinary, well that and some could choose Monarch as well.

but I don't mind the whole "Princess" thing, maybe because I'm one of the different types of Nonbinary that is more of a Nonbinary-Gal and still go by She/Her.

plus there is that whole info I found before, that has to do with the info I found before that has to do with O RH D Negative the blue blood and also called Sange Azure, and how it is a very Ancient Bloodline...well that, and also I'm pretty sure O RH D Positive might be the same, you know Ancient as well.

anyway one of the information about the O RH D Negative, has to do with it being a very Ancient Bloodline and it having to do with The Spiritual Royal Bloodline.

I'm still gonna hope that Jesus is just a distant cousin, I still want to pray for him every once in a while, so both he and the Antichrist do NOT cross a line...

we still need the Divine Feminine energy to heal, that means that we need more balance and not some Masculine energies crossing lines they shouldn't and making the healing process of the Feminine have a setback and taking even longer...

I can still believe in the good side of Jesus, but I'm still gonna hope that the terrible futures that involve him and his army and the Antichrist, can be prevented...

we need to think both empathically and a bit more logically in maybe in a more open mind to the Feminine parts of Men, Women and Nonbinary, and even if I do talk about this, I know it's not likely many will even listen and try to understand the messed up stuff that is going on, is because that the Toxic-Masculine energy is out of control.

the reason why the Toxic-Feminine energy isn't as bad but is still a bit dangerous, is because it hasn't been around as long as it's Masculine counterpart.

we need both the Divine Masculine and Divine Feminine, and I'm gonna try to hope that Toxic-Masculine energy is stop soon, in the right way and not in the Toxic-Masculine way...

also there is a reason I'm hoping that Jesus is just a distant cousin.

even if it could be interesting if he were a Ancestor, and the whole "Grandpa" thing...like possibly addressing him like that...

but there would be a down side to it to me...

I mean I did point out before that I'm not only Seth's descendant, but I'm also Cain's descendant...and I had looked up some info before that has to do with some info that makes me hope that I'm only Jesus's distant cousin...

I mean yeah, some of my royal ancestors were from France, but ya can't prove it even if there is that whole info about Mary Magdalene escaping to the south of france and raised a family that make up Jesus's children.

I already know about some of the hot mess that goes on with well, what is going on...I'm still hoping to just go live where the Earthly-Mother is, or like make some plans to someday just run away to another universe...

Cain's Dad isn't the boss of me, and I'm not talking about his REAL Dad Adam, but his suppose and possible Bio-Dad...whichever he is.

I'm still gonna give Cain and Seth those nicknames "Grunkle-Paw"

cause they would technically be both Grunkles and Grandpas...

also I know I don't work 100% like other Earth Angels, and maybe only some are Weird too...I mean I'm weird enough to have the whole "Earth Angel Princess" pop into my head, and the whole nicknaming myself "Eveningstar Princess"...

which doesn't really have to do with Lucifer, cause once again...

it is from the whole thing with my Mom and how she never got Morning Sickness with me, she only got Evening Sickness.

still need to look up the whole "Michael Eveningstar" thing, well that info that has to do with Archangel Michael and how he also went by both "Morning Star" and "Evening Star", I will look that up again when I'm able to.

what would be freaky, if Lucifer's Twin Brother that is known in the Fanon AUs of Hazbin Hotel, ended up appearing in the canon and he goes by "Michael Eveningstar"...

so help me if he goes by "Eveningstar" I might end up freaking out. O_O

maybe not fully, but maybe just a little freaking out...

but anyway, there might not be much to say about the whole weird dream about my acting as "Priestess" and marrying Vox and Valentino...

like the whole saying "do you take Valentino to be your Babe."

and the whole "do you take Vox to be your Boo."

normally it be "husband" or "wife" or for some "partner"...

guess I was just being really weird in that dream.

well I had that weird dream about Husk that time, but he might of been drunk, and he ended up leaning on me, and if I remember right, he said I smelled nice...I knew I wrote it in my diary so I don't forget, same with that weird dream that has to do with Vox and Valentino and that weird dream happen on June 1, 2024.

Valentino & Vox almost had a June Wedding, and if I had finished the dream, I could of told them to kiss...

and I had watched the new episode of Helluva Boss first, before I had that weird dream...

and yeah, got way off topic probably around the whole if some a Toxic-Problem with me believing in both the Heavenly-Father & Earthly-Mother, they could go and kiss Mammon's butt...

well maybe like the Helluva Boss version of Mammon if that were possible, well either him or one of the Cuphead AU version of Mammon.

his and Stella's ship name Mamtella, still reminds me of food and yeah I did get hungry that time and my stomach growled a little because of it...it might remind me of Nutella, and I'm trying not to go as crazy on it like the last time I first tried it...I think I am doing a bit more better than that time.

and that Mamtella name had pop into my head, not sure if many people who ship Mammon x Stella are using it, but I hope they will at some point.

still gonna remind me of Nutella...

anyway if I ever have a dream like that again, and that is a big if...

I'm gonna finish marrying Valentino & Vox, and have them kiss. XD

[icarusofmine]

WHAT IF THEY ARE GETTING RID OF HIS MERCH BECAUSE HE IS LEAVING THEM

to be very real, after the way rca and the rest of zayn’s team treated him it’s only a matter of time before he officially leaves them

[farfromharry]

. ˚ ༘♡ ⋆｡˚ New Year’s 2022 ˚ ༘♡ ⋆｡˚ .

total works; 16 , total word count; 225,207

━━━━━━━━━♡♥♡━━━━━━━━━

[ january ]

you talk too much - peter parker

Summary: Peter cannot fall in love with a criminal, he can’t, right? So why does he find you so attractive and charming? And will mr stark be mad at him for accidentally kissing you after you wouldn’t shut up?

the nurse’s office - peter parker

Summary: Sometimes Peter forgets about his super strength. He simply wanted to put Brad Davis in his place when he tried to make a mockery of him, and now he was sitting in the nurses office with a very pretty, very concussed girl; oh and it was all his fault.

[ february ]

the set up - peter parker

Summary: For Valentine’s day Peter really wants to take you out somewhere, bad blood aside just to have an evening as normal kids. But it all goes wrong when you believe he set the whole thing up to capture you.

[ march ]

our little secret - tom holland

Summary: Why plan a luxurious wedding when you could just get married in the moment? Except you and Tom kept it a secret from the world, so when the secret finally unravels at Harrison’s wedding, will everyone think you’re just trying to steal the spotlight?

nothing more, nothing less - tom holland

Summary: tom’s always been told that you and him would fall in love one day, and when you don’t he begins to think something’s wrong with him. that is until his mum tells him about platonic soulmates.

[ april ]

right person, wrong universe - peter parker

Summary: You're convinced that Peter Parker was your soulmate in this and every universe that may exist. What happens when he loses you, ends up stuck in another universe and has that idea proved right all in a short span of time?

in my dreams - peter parker

Summary: Death happens at the most unexpected times, and we’re never ready for it. But Peter wasn’t ready to leave you in heart until he knew you’d moved on and you were ready to give your heart to someone that wasn’t him.

[ may ]

the bet - harry holland

Summary: Harry Holland was a dick, a dick that agreed to make a bet against one of the sweetest people he’d ever met. However his conscience got the better of him and he had to let you know, but you took it better than expected and of course you had a trick up your sleeve that let everything work out for the both of you.

[ june ]

the angel and the devil - eddie munson

Summary: The two of you met at a halloween costume in polar opposite outfits. What started as Eddie being a gentleman and helping out a drunk girl, turned into a rapidly blooming crush. He believed it to be one sided after he thought you were avoiding him, but you were falling hard too, just too shy to admit to the guy you nearly puked on that he was kind of cute.

the dance - eddie munson

Summary: Who in their right mind would want to take time from their own prom to dance with Eddie ‘the freak’ Munson? Answer: you. He was alone on the bleachers with the cutest pouty face and you couldn’t stand to see him like that, though he knew it was probably out of pity anyway. But little did he know you had had a budding crush on him since the second time he repeated his senior year. Now you were both seniors (again) and this might be your last chance to tell him.

the freak and his girlfriend - eddie munson

Summary: The two of you go on more dates together until Eddie finally gets the perfect green light to officially ask you to be his girlfriend. Spoiler alert, Steve still doesn’t approve.

[ july ]

beth - eddie munson

Summary: Eddie’s trying to navigate adulthood after a baby is dropped on him from a prior hookup. He tries his best for the baby girl and does well, things are made even easier with the help of his friends around him. When he meets you his life flips again, and although it takes a while to admit your feelings, he eventually ends up with a family he never expected he would have.

[ august ] + [ september ]

apparently i posted no fics in this time

[ october ]

always had you - steve harrington

Summary: You and Steve had terrible luck when it came to dating. It wasn’t until it was pointed out to you, that maybe that was because you were in love with your best friend.

[ november ]

long live the hero - eddie munson

Summary: After Eddie almost dies in the upside down, Steve and Dustin need to take him somewhere that he can get help, only a wanted criminal can’t go to a hospital; so they take him to you. They’re not completely unaware about your history together, but they, nor you, suspected that history would start to repeat itself and you would find yourself falling for Eddie Munson all over again. 

i put a spell on you - eddie munson

Summary: Eddie stumbles upon a house in the middle of the woods that contains something he never expected. What happens next is a lot of crazy shit, that takes him on a rollercoaster of emotions. But what he got out of it was a pretty great girlfriend and confirmation that magic was real, and badass.

[ december ]

in another life - eddie munson

Summary: Eddie bumps his head after a fight with you and experiences two separate dreams of what his life could be like if things with you were different. When he wakes up back in your arms afterwards, he learns to appreciate what he has.

[fumiko-matsubara]

A Timeline of the whole messy Kaho + Maehara + Seo situation

Just trying to make sense of what was shown and hinted in the manga.

Because Class E students typically don’t graduate by the end of the school year, they are officially expelled from Kunugigaoka by the 3rd Trimester (Jan-Mar), which is all about high school exams preparations. The Class E building will then instead be occupied by the future Class E students for accommodation purposes.

The sorting for future Class E students among the 2nd years will likely occur a little after the announcements of their final exam results, which was in December.

Which means that Kaho and Maehara likely dated before December 2013.

Maehara basically ghosted Kaho ever since dropping to Class E.

Maybe until somewhere in May 2014.

And within those 5 months of ghosting, he probably even dated a bunch of girls behind her back. It explains why Nagisa described Maehara as someone who is so popular that the girl he’s seen with constantly changes.

He cheated on her 4 times the whole time they’ve been apart.

And it also explains why nobody was under the impression that he and Kaho have been dating for a long time, even though Maehara is notorious for his extensive dating history.

Hell, I’m sure that people barely even knew that they dated, or that they had already forgotten that they were dating by the time the new school year began.

Enter Seo, the new guy in the situation.

Who is also unaware of Maehara’s relationship with Kaho for some strange reason despite having a whole wide network of people to tell him what’s going on.

Horrible temper, verbally abusive, incredibly rude, and his appearance couldn’t even make it up for his horrible personality - not a single box was checked in Kaho’s criteria for the kind of guys she’s famously into (Ikemen).

So, no fucking way would she date him.

But, here’s the catch: Seo is a virtuoso - his incredibly high social standing in Kunigigaoka’s student hierarchy despite his horrible personality canonically makes everyone uncomfortable.

And Kaho is just another student from the most average class in their year.

But she’s incredibly pretty.

It could be to make himself look good in front of others for having a beautiful girlfriend or whatever. Regardless of what Seo’s reasons are for dating her, the extreme power imbalance between the two of them gives Kaho no choice but to date him at his demand.

This could have happened in April 2014, when the new school year solidifies Seo’s standing as among the virtuosos.

Fast forward.

It was in June 2014 when some of the current Class E students spotted Kaho and Maehara walking together under the rain.

That makes it more than 6-7 months of dating.

And yet, for some strange reason, none of the present Class E students where under the impression that they were dating for a long time. In fact, Kaho was made seem to be a new girlfriend of Maehara’s instead.

Which could mean that Maehara waltzed back into Kaho’s life fairly recently.

I’m just gonna assume it’s somewhere between late May to early June.

The 5th time he cheated on her, was when he scheduled that date with a girl from another school, when they are actively dating.

Because there is no other way he could schedule a new date that quick right after Kaho officially broke up with him, when preparations still had to be made for Class E to execute their revenge plan.

And he looked guilty as fuck.

Kaho and Seo most likely broke up after fighting over who gets to use the bathroom in the convenience store.

As shown in the baseball arc, Kaho openly hates him to the bone.

Since then, she has been actively going after other boys she finds cool.

Then summer came.

According to Gakushuu, if Class A had won the bet against Class E, a truth that Maehara specifically isn’t allowed to lie about when asked was the fact that he had been cheating FIVE TIMES.

(I used a raw scan I have saved in my gallery, because the two available English scanlations online translated that question in such a vague way you wouldn't have caught it - how many times you've "lied/been distracted" - when the first two characters here 浮気 translates to anything that literally means "cheating (in a relationship)").

Meaning, by the time summer came, not even Kaho knew about this.

Note: There's a chance that the amount of times Maehara had cheated in a relationship isn't actually exclusive to just Kaho herself and it might just be in general.

But the way that the people around them were seemingly under the impression that Kaho is a more recent girlfriend of Maehara's, when they've been actually dating for half a year, just solidifies the theory that he had been seeing other girls behind her back all this time.

But whether that theory is correct or not, it doesn't change the solid fact that he still cheated on her at least once, which was when he already had that other date scheduled.

This arc... pisses me off. I know I've said that many times already. And I will still say it.

What initially seemed to be an arc about Maehara's early character development because he was the focus here... ended up blatantly showing how much of a hypocritical trashy guy he instead actually is.

Because how shameless are you to be going around cheating left and right without any regard for your current girlfriend's feelings, but the second you're on the receiving end of a cheating matter, you didn't even hesitate to expose her just so you wouldn't get the blame?

And for that alone, Kaho throwing him under the bus right after was honestly DESERVED.

I would have found this arc less pointless if the deleted Valentine's arc with Okano was instead the follow up, where Koro finally gave Maehara a piece of his mind about this whole non regard for a girl's feelings after realizing that the kid learned absolutely nothing from the situation with Kaho.

None of that whole bullshit about being completely transparent in Maehara's report card just to motivate him to do something. I just want Maehara to set things right with Okano on his own accord. No outside influences or whatsoever. Because that report card threat just made everything seem not genuine and it would really hurt to be Okano in that situation.

I don't mind the retaliation arc being left unchanged if it was instead used as a motivation to set things right in the future.

[sironae]

May and June Art submissions. I forgot to Upload May on here. Oops! At least they both go together! May Art Piece - 1st Image: Here is Lucifer Cosmar-Long, Darius (mine) and Levi's (@Zungiebungie) son. Darius is the bio father, and Levi officially adopted him when Darius and Levi married, about a year after they got custody of Luci. I was finding it a bit hard to bet motivated this month drawing wise, but pushed myself since I missed May last year - I was not going to miss it again this year! The Background is recycled from a piece of mine from last year, which features Luci's bio father, Darius. I didn't just want him floating without a BG, so this seemed fitting enough.

June Art Piece - 2nd Image: I decided to continue on with the momentum I had for Luci and draw up his adolescent design to get it out of my brain. I reused the small bat form because nothing really changes there, but the bat-beast form obviously grows and ages as Luci does. His fashion style is based on the 1940s era as he would be an adult around that time, but still keeping to the typical fancy Cosmar Fashion~

[no-disco]

Sounds, 27th June 1981. Photos by Virginia Turbett

transcription under the cut

photos and article taked from sacreddm.net on the wayback machine

  Five months ago the prospect of doing an interview shut inside an airless, sterile studio would have made Depeche Mode run all the way home to Basildon. But then five months, as Wowington Woy would say, is a long time in the wacky world of wock and woll. One look at Vince Clarke sitting confidently behind the mixing desk and shorts-sporting Martin Gore’s welcoming smile and I knew things would be hunky dory.

  Dan “The Man” Miller quickly ordered Martin back in front of the mike to contribute his part to the now characteristic Mode quasi-barbershop harmonics on a new track which might be the new single, or possibly the start of the (gasp) album.

  “I just can’t get enough, I just can’t get enough,” sung Mart.

  But he had, and stopped for a cuppa and a chat.

  Les Moders, as I’ve hinted, are now 100% more confident, talkative, witty and brighter than all other known brands of washing powder. (Shurely shome mishtake?) Vince set his synth onto random programming to break the icky atmosphere and we commenced. How appropriate! With one record set straight – ie Depeche Mode aren’t shy, incommunicative, fragile young things at all, here’s the official mode of pronunciation: Depech-ay, if you please. “It’s probably grammatically wrong,” said Vince. “But we like it that way.” [1]

  Okay. Depecheeee Mode are laying down lotsa new tracks, having come to a halt after mucho gigging around London following the surprise success of “Dreaming Of Me” and even bigger surprise of “New Life”. Up until now Andy and Martin have had day jobs so the touring principle is only now an ongoing viability. Offers of the calibre of Classix and Toyah had been pouring in, but Vince reckoned it wasn’t the best thing for them to do at the time. Martin considered that the Classix tour may have tied them irrevocably to the futuromanticism tag which they’ve steadfastly been trying (unsuccessfully) to avoid.

  But of the bands who secured deals following the “Some Bizzare” LP, Depeche have fared the best: their simple, uncomplicated synthi-pop tunes are terribly hard to dislike, after all.

  “We had a sad day on Tuesday, though,” said David Gahan, crest suddenly fallen, “we expected “New Life” to go up a bit more. I think we all thought it wasn’t gonna do much at first, but inside… You can’t tell.”

  Funny, ’cos “New Life” is definitely even more instant than the debut… Vince: “It’s really up isn’t it.”

  David: “We learned a lot from “Dreaming”, came in here and just did a better job on the next one.”

  And that riveting little synth riff is still locked in my head, reminding me of God-knows-what. Just an old r&b riff, said Vince. No, it’s a good job they do have insistent hooks – David reckoned people have beaucoup de trouble remembering the name:

  “I bet they get to the shop and forget the name. They go on, hum the tune and say oh, can’t remember the name, I’ll have that Duran Duran one instead!”

  Andy Fletcher suggested Dep Mod as an abbreviation in fine Orch Man tradition. An imaginary lightbulb above Vince’s head suddenly fired him with a cracking good idea.

  “When your photographer comes,” he smirked, “can we have a picture taken in the back of Dan’s Renault? Just like Spandau Ballet? Only there’ll be five of us in the back, and we’ll all be squashed up like this…” (David imitates dead sardine)

  OK, wrench those tongues out of yer cheeks, boys. Mutemobile, indeed? It is true that they did well in the US Disco charts and have great appeal for Europe too… deals are currently being set up with several different majors to get Mode released in France, Germany et al. Many doubted the ability of Mute and Miller to break the Modes, but for an indie they’ve broken the required barriers.

  David: “We would much rather have had points than big advances, and we’ve got that with Daniel – he’s proved he can get us what we want, there’s nothing he can’t do – that we haven’t found out yet!”

  Andy: “Indies are at their height, they never used to get in the charts before.”

  David: “And radio stations are more likely to play indies.”

  Vince: “They have to pay less royalties!”

  David: “Radio One have been very good to us – 3 plays a day on this one. They said they’d stick with it, give it lots of airplay.”

  So from the insecure, nervous and unsure start, things have actually turned out as they’d hoped?

  Vince: “It has really. You learn things very quickly. With Mute we know everything that’s going on, we’re in contact with distributors, pluggers and promotion people every day.”

  Andy: “What we don’t know is what a major is like. We’re quite happy with our set up, but we don’t know if the distribution could be better.”

  Aah, but Rough Trade gets you into those little shops that the hordes of independent buyers frequent, you lucky boys.

  Andy then proceeded to go off at a tangent (this is not unusual), musing about how the band’s audiences had changed, become much younger. No-one else agreed.

  David: “We get a varied audience, you can’t say that at all!”

  Vince: “In clubs an’ that, the audience is already there, they haven’t come to see us.”

  David: “Don’t be silly! You can’t say everywhere we play has a fixed audience!”

  Andy: “You’re getting worse than Martin now… Martin hasn’t said one thing yet!”    Martin woke up. “I’m saving it up, it’s all going to come out in a minute, I’m just waiting for the right question.”

  We launched into a discussion about clubs, people not dressing up as much as they used to and the sight of Midge Ure sending lace-clad young girls into the water and into a frenzy at Crystal Pal last week.

  This caused much amusement.

  Andy: “That’s what Martin does!”

  Martin: “You’re asking for it, Fletch…”

  To avert a full-scale war, I mentioned my liking for the “Rio” mix of “Shout!”, B-Side of their first ever 12”. They love the rhythm, but the song? David loves it, Vince hates it, Martin says so-so. Humph. It’s the first dancefloor oriented thing they’ve done tho’, eh?

  Andy: “Apart from the things we did when we were Light Of The World…” Silence… laughter!

  They all paused to watch Daniel frowning in the control room, doubtless searching for that stray note out of tune. A conspiracy brewed. “What was that thing we wanted in Jaws about Daniel?” they whispered. “Nooooo – don’t put it in, he’d know it was us… if you say it, Andy, you’re the one – we all tried to stop you!” [2]

  Andy turned to me with a probing question. “Who told you about the folk group and church hall thing?” (Referring to a gossip item about their acoustic past). “We practised in a church hall, that’s all.” [3]

  And they’re recording in a deconsecrated church now! [4]

  David: “Yeah, we just love churches.”

  Martin: “You wait till you hear our new single – it’s a gospel song.”

  David: “It’s called “Have You Got The Sunshine Smile”.”

  Andy sung the words, gesticulating his finger at his smiling lips in Sunday School teacher style.

  David: “On the picture bag, there’s Andy’s face, and when you press his nose, a finger comes out and there’s Martin inside showing the actions. Martin doing the Mode!”

  And they chorused: “Have you got the sunshine HA-HA-HA HEE HEE.” I think this is what we in the trade call a joke…

  On entering studiospace, I’d noticed Darryl, Fan Club President and original Silicon Teen, scribbling away replies to D Mode fan mail. Are they getting lots?

  David: “Not really. We were just trying to impress you! We were s’posed to have this Postman come in just after you with a great big sack!”

  Andy: “Yeah, binfuls of used biros, hard skin on our fingers where we’ve been writing so much!”

  Well, I saw at least ten letters.

  David: “A lot of them are really young. This 13 year old boy wrote us a story using words from the singles and sent us some badge designs.”

  Vince: “We’re pop! Ultra pop!”

  Andy: “People write to us from up North but they haven’t seen us. We want to branch out from London, but first we must rehearse new material, we’ve been doing the same set for 4 months. The live show should be better, more danceable.”

  Daniel looked quizzical again. The boys told him to stop listening in.

  Andy: “He’s a great man. Look – the ultimate picture of Daniel Miller, father of electronic music…”

  Vince: “Grandfather, more like.”

  Daniel the scolding father retorted, “I can hear you.”

  A man from ITV arrived to discus Dep Mod’s appearance on a 20th Century Box prog on the Essex music scene, past and present. Depeche are to be filmed live at Croc’s in Rayleigh, and filmed au naturel around Basildon, all to be shown sometime in August.

  “You can film my usual Saturday morning routine,” joked David. “Have a sauna, go to a brothel, then a commando course… Nah, it’ll be Andy waking up at 5am, having ’is toast and going down the newsagents for his paper round. Boys next door!” He concluded, sensibly: “It doesn’t matter if we’re sitting on the loo – a minute on tele is better than a thousand radio plays.”

  Andy came over all pensive again, wondering why so many of their interviews spent more time talking about Daniel than the band.

  “There’s nothing really that people can say about us is there? All other bands go on about political things, we don’t talk about our views.”

  Dave: “We don’t have political views, I don’t think.”

  Andy: “There’s always an extrovert member of a band with strong views.” [5]

  Vince: “We don’t stand for anything united do we?”

  Andy: “We haven’t got a person who’s domineering.”

  David: “That’s good!”

  Andy: “On the other hand, that’s why our interviews are very empty, ’cause usually the loudmouth of a band goes on about what the Labour party are doing or something.”

  Martin: “Sexism always comes up too, especially with HM bands.”

  David: “They always talk about sex.”

  Vince: “It’s all that macho stuff.”

  Macho. Dep Mod certainly aren’t Macho. Now they were in a more reflective mood, I asked what their immediate hopes for the future were.

  Chorus: “Ultimate success!”

  David: “We’re happy as it is, we’d just like some money.”

  Vince: “We want to change our sound, get some new stuff together, get a good live show.”

  Vince: “We don’t want to get like Kraftwerk, we don’t want to use tapes any more. We’ve got a rhythm unit with a TV screen that plays Space Invaders as well!” [6]

  Andy: “We want to give the show more of an aura.”

  David: “Down the Bridgehouse?!”

  Now there’s a thought… anything else?

  David: “Yes, Andy would love to have a cult following, be underground. We have gigs in here when Vince is getting down on the mixer, and Andy sings! Things get on top of you in the studio – you have to do something to let it all go, so we come in here and scream and shout.”

  The lads played me a tape of impromptu raw electro-punk with Crass-style vocals by Andy, featuring a cover version of “Simple Simon Says”, “You’re Gonna Lose That Girl” and a sensitive rendition of a popular school hymn. There’s that religious influence again… But they need this relief valve from the precise orderliness required to produce their brand of neatly-packed pop songs – operating, generating new life for our pop kids.

  A lot of people know the name Depeche Mode now. Now you know who they are, what they are. Like their boss, they’re all heart – boys next door who turn into Ultra Popsters at the flick of a switch. Mode: strictly not avant-garde.